Owner's Manual Smart Fortwo Coupé and Smart Fortwo Cabrio Electric Drive

6522 0254 02 453 584 11 12 Edition ÄJ2017-1b Order no. Part no. 4535841112 É4535841112"ËÍ

>> Owner's Manual smart fortwo coupé and smart fortwo cabrio electric drive

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand Owner's Manual, smart fortwo coupé and cabrio electric drive Symbols in the Owner's Manual Publication details The following symbols are used in this Own- Internet er's Manual: G WARNING Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites: which could pose a threat to your health or http://www.smart.com life, or to the health and life of others. http://www.daimler.com H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with Editorial office information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this ! Notes on material damage alert you to Owner's Manual to the technical documen- dangers that could lead to damage to your tation team at the following address: vehicle. Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, i These symbols indicate useful instruc- 70546 Stuttgart, Germany tions or further information that could be ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated helpful to you. or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. X Instructions that must be followed. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several consecutive steps. Vehicle manufacturer (Y page) Further information on a topic YY A warning or an instruction that is con- Daimler AG tinued on the next page. Mercedesstraße 137 Display text: Display text in the instru- 70327 Stuttgart ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys- tem or the smart Media-System. Germany

As at 13.06.2017 About this Owner's Manual your vehicle and multimedia system Before you first drive off, read this Owner's online on your phone or as a download Manual carefully and familiarise yourself regardless of the status of your network with your vehicle. For your own safety and a connection. Available for smartphones longer vehicle life, follow the instructions or tablets. and warning notices in this manual. Disre- QR codes for the smart guides app. garding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. This Owner's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: RModel Apple® iOS ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Android™ smart therefore reserves the right to intro- Please note that the smart guides app may duce changes in the following areas: not currently be available in your country. RDesign REquipment RTechnical features Therefore, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. Integral parts of the vehicle include: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent Supplements These documents should be kept in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Owner's Manuals: Digital on the Internet The Owner's Manual on the Internet provides you with convenient access to all the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system. It also offers helpful animations, exciting background information and a wide variety of search options. Digital as an app Using the smart guides app, you can call up all of the information relevant to

4535841112 É4535841112"ËÍ

2 Contents

Braking correctly ...... 66 Index ...... 4 Driving on wet roads ...... 67 Winter driving ...... 67 Introduction ...... 20 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 67 Protecting the environment ...... 20 Cruise control and limiter ...... 68 smart genuine parts ...... 20 Charging the high-voltage battery ..... 69 Warranty for the smart Audio-Sys- tem and smart Media-System ...... 21 Ensuring good visibility ...... 79 Vehicle equipment ...... 21 Switching on the lighting ...... 79 Operating safety ...... 21 Adjusting the lighting ...... 80 QR codes for rescue card ...... 25 Using the interior lighting ...... 81 Data stored in the vehicle ...... 25 Using the windscreen wipers ...... 81 Copyright information ...... 27 Folding the sun visor to the side ...... 83

At a glance ...... 28 Feeling comfortable in the vehicle Cockpit ...... 28 interior ...... 84 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 29 Locking and unlocking the doors Centre console with drawer ...... 30 from the inside ...... 84 Overhead control panel ...... 31 Understanding the reversing fea- Door control panel ...... 32 ture ...... 85 Displays shown in the instrument Opening and closing the windows ...... 85 cluster and the display ...... 33 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) ...... 86 Safety ...... 34 Fitting and removing the draught Occupant safety ...... 34 stop (smart fortwo cabrio) ...... 89 Children in the vehicle ...... 40 Operating the climate control sys- Pets in the vehicle ...... 51 tem ...... 89 Driving safely ...... 51 Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating ... 92 Using the accessories ...... 93 Entering and setting up ...... 54 Understanding functions of the key ... 54 Opening the door ...... 54 Parking and getting out ...... 95 Correct driver's seat position ...... 54 Parking ...... 95 Adjusting the seats ...... 55 Using the parking aid ...... 95 Adjusting the steering wheel ...... 56 Using the reversing camera ...... 95 Adjusting the mirrors ...... 57 Locking the vehicle ...... 97 Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system ...... 98 Driving ...... 59 Starting the engine ...... 59 Pulling away ...... 59 Operating the on-board computer ...... 99 Automatic transmission ...... 61 Overview of the on-board computer ... 99 Using the turn signals ...... 62 Calling up displays ...... 100 Acoustic presence indicator ...... 62 Setting values ...... 102 Radar-based recuperation ...... 62 Driving economically ...... 63 Contents 3

Changing the window wiper blades .. 157 Using the smart Audio-System ...... 105 Cleaning the vehicle ...... 158 Operating and setting the smart Observing service due dates ...... 162 Audio-System ...... 105 Parking up the vehicle ...... 163 Listening to the radio ...... 107 Using a mobile phone ...... 109 Operating external data storage Dealing with accidents and break- media ...... 111 downs ...... 164 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown ...... 164 Using the smart Media-System ...... 113 Removing the first-aid kit ...... 166 Operating and setting up the smart Removing the fire extinguisher ...... 167 Media-System ...... 113 Removing the vehicle tool tray ...... 167 Listening to the radio ...... 118 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit .. 167 Calling up electric drive displays ..... 119 Towing the vehicle ...... 170 Using a mobile phone ...... 120 Manually releasing the selector Connecting and operating external lever lock ...... 172 data storage media ...... 124 Replacing the bulbs ...... 172 Viewing images ...... 126 Changing fuses ...... 175 Video playback ...... 127 Replacing the key battery ...... 176 Using the navigation system ...... 127 Opening a door with the emergency Managing apps ...... 137 release ...... 177 Locking the doors in an emergency .. 177 Using online offerings ...... 139 Online access to the vehicle ...... 139 Practical advice ...... 179 Using smart "ready to" services ...... 139 Notes on display messages ...... 179 Locking and unlocking ...... 179 Loading and stowing ...... 141 Visibility, occupants, airbags ...... 180 Stowing small objects ...... 141 Engine, brakes, transmission ...... 182 Stowing luggage and large objects ... 142 Charging process ...... 185 Using the boot separator ...... 144 Driving safety systems ...... 188 Removing/fitting the charging Driver assistance systems ...... 193 cable bag ...... 145 Battery, lights, heating ...... 196 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System ...... 198 Maintenance and care ...... 147 Useful information ...... 147 Removing/fitting the subwoofer ...... 147 Technical data ...... 200 Opening and closing the service Obtaining technical data ...... 200 cover ...... 147 Reading vehicle data ...... 200 Checking service products and top- Service products ...... 202 ping up ...... 149 Bulb types ...... 202 Checking wheels and tyres ...... 150 Fuse allocation ...... 203 Changing a wheel ...... 151 Radio type approvals for the tyre Using the tyre pressure monitor ...... 154 pressure monitors ...... 205 Checking the tyre pressures ...... 155 Installing two-way radios and Using winter tyres ...... 156 mobile phones ...... 206 Using snow chains ...... 157 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Limited protection ...... 39 Overview ...... 38 12 V socket PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator see Socket (12 V) lamps ...... 39 Airbags A Front airbag (driver, front ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) passenger) ...... 38 Display message ...... 188 Kneebag ...... 38 Function/notes ...... 51 Protection provided ...... 38 Warning lamp (yellow) ...... 188 Sidebag ...... 38 Acceleration Triggering ...... 35 see Kickdown Windowbag ...... 38 Acoustic presence indicator Alarm Deactivating/activating ...... 62 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 98 Function/notes ...... 62 Switching off ...... 98 Active Brake Assist Alerts Activating or deactivating ...... 53 Setting (Audio-System) ...... 108 Display message ...... 193 Ambient lighting Forward collision warning Setting the brightness ...... 104 function ...... 52 Switching on/off ...... 103 Function/notes ...... 51 Android Auto™ Important safety notes ...... 52 Using ...... 123 Switching off/on (on-board Animals computer with colour display) ..... 103 see Pets in the vehicle Switching on/off (on-board Anti-entrapment feature computer with monochrome see Reversing feature display) ...... 102 Anti-lock Braking System Adjusting the headlamp range ...... 80 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air conditioning Anti-skid chains General notes ...... 89 see Snow chains Air distribution Anti-theft alarm system Setting (automatic climate con- Priming/deactivating ...... 98 trol) ...... 90 Switching off the alarm ...... 98 Air pressure Apps see Tyre pressure Displaying/calling up ...... 138 Air vents General notes ...... 137 Important safety notes ...... 91 Installing ...... 137 Setting ...... 91 Aquaplaning ...... 67 Air vents Ashtray ...... 93 see Air vents Audio-System Air-recirculation mode Connecting a mobile phone ...... 109 Switching on/off (automatic Connecting Bluetooth® audio climate control) ...... 90 devices ...... 112 Airbag Connecting external audio Enabling and disabling the equipment (AUX) ...... 112 passenger airbag* ...... 44 Operating ...... 105 Headbag ...... 38 Operating the radio ...... 107 Installation locations ...... 38 Operating via the mobile phone .. 106 Index 5

Overview ...... 105 Battery (key) Setting interruption for news ...... 108 Important safety notes ...... 176 Setting the time ...... 107 Replacing ...... 176 Smartphone bracket ...... 105 Battery (vehicle) System settings ...... 106 see High-voltage battery Troubleshooting ...... 198 Belt Using external devices ...... 105 see Seat belt Volume/sound settings ...... 107 Belt tensioner Warranty ...... 21 Activation ...... 35 Authorised workshop Belt warning ...... 37 see Qualified specialist workshop Blower speed Automatic climate control Increasing or decreasing (auto- Activating/deactivating air- matic climate control) ...... 90 recirculation mode ...... 90 Bluetooth® Cooling with air dehumidifica- Activating mobile phone tion ...... 90 (Audio-System) ...... 109 Demisting the rear window ...... 91 Activating the mobile phone Demisting the windscreen ...... 90 (Media-System) ...... 120 Increasing/decreasing the Authorising function for mobile blower speed ...... 90 phone (Audio-System) ...... 109 Setting air distribution ...... 90 Connecting a device (Media- Setting the temperature ...... 90 System) ...... 125 Switching on/off ...... 90 Operating (Audio-System) ...... 112 Windows misted up ...... 91 Switching on/off (Media-Sys- Automatic headlamp mode ...... 79 tem) ...... 120 Automatic transmission Bonnet (front) Display message ...... 184 see Service cover Engaging neutral ...... 61 Boot Engaging reverse gear ...... 61 see Tailgate Engaging the park position ...... 61 Boot separator Important safety notes ...... 61 Fitting ...... 144 Kickdown ...... 61 Removing ...... 145 Manually releasing the selector Brake lever lock ...... 172 EBD ...... 53 Pulling away ...... 59 Brake Assist Starting the engine ...... 59 see Active Brake Assist Transmission positions ...... 61 Brake fluid AUX jack Display message ...... 183 Audio-System ...... 105 Brake force distribution Media-System ...... 113 see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) B Brake lamp Replacing bulbs ...... 173 Battery Brake lamps Display message ...... 196 Display message ...... 196 Battery Brakes see High-voltage battery ABS ...... 51 Driving tips ...... 66 6 Index

Important safety notes ...... 66 Wheels ...... 160 Parking brake ...... 60 Windows ...... 160 Warning lamp ...... 183 Wiper blades ...... 160 Braking Central locking Braking on steep downhill gra- Automatic locking ...... 84 dients ...... 66 Locking/unlocking (key) ...... 97 Braking on wet road surfaces ...... 66 Centre console Limited braking performance Overview ...... 30 on salt-treated roads ...... 66 Changing the route Breakdown Navigation ...... 131 Towing away ...... 170 Charge cable see Flat tyre Display message ...... 185 Charge level display ...... 64 C Charging see Charging the high-voltage Car battery see Vehicle Charging cable Car key Connection ...... 78 see Key Control panel ...... 75 Car wash Disconnecting ...... 78 see Care Heating up ...... 73 Car wash (care) ...... 159 Storing ...... 78 Care Version 1 (mode 2) ...... 76 Automatic car wash ...... 159 Version 2 (mode 2) ...... 76 Carpets ...... 162 Charging cable bag Cleaning the interior ...... 161 Removing/fitting ...... 145 Cleaning the roof lining (smart Charging current fortwo coupé) ...... 162 Display messages ...... 185 Display ...... 161 Child restraint system Exterior ...... 158 Suitability of the seats for Exterior lighting ...... 161 attaching belt-secured child High-pressure cleaner ...... 159 restraint systems ...... 47 High-voltage battery ...... 73 Suitability of the seats for Interior ...... 161 attaching ISOFIX child restraint Matt paintwork ...... 158 systems ...... 48 Notes ...... 158 Child seat Paint ...... 161 Forward-facing restraint sys- Plastic trim ...... 162 tem ...... 46 Reversing camera ...... 159 i-Size ...... 42 Roof lining ...... 161 ISOFIX ...... 42 Seat belt ...... 161 On the front-passenger seat ...... 45 Seat cover ...... 162 Rearward-facing restraint sys- Selector lever ...... 161 tem ...... 46 Sensors ...... 160 Recommendations ...... 49 Soft-top system ...... 161 Suitability of the seats for i- Steering wheel ...... 161 Size child restraint systems ...... 49 Trim pieces ...... 162 Suitable positions ...... 47 Washing by hand ...... 159 Top Tether ...... 43 Index 7

Children General notes ...... 68 Restraint systems ...... 40 Important safety notes ...... 68 Cigarette lighter ...... 93 Increasing/decreasing the Cleaning speed ...... 69 see Care Storing and maintaining cur- Climate control rent speed ...... 69 Automatic air conditioning ...... 90 Cup holder Setting the air vents ...... 91 Centre console ...... 141 Clock Important safety notes ...... 141 Setting the time (Media-Sys- Cup holder tem) ...... 116 see Cup holder Cockpit Overview ...... 28 D Collision warning DAB radio Warning lamp ...... 193 see Digital radio COMAND display Dashboard Cleaning ...... 161 see Cockpit Connectivity manager ...... 138 Data Constant headlamp mode see Technical data see Daytime driving lights Data sharing Consumption details Managing ...... 138 Calling up (Media-System) ...... 120 Data storage media Controlling speed see External data storage media see Cruise control Daytime driving lights ...... 79 Coolant Dealership Checking coolant level and top- see Qualified specialist workshop ping up ...... 149 Declarations of conformity ...... 22 Important safety notes ...... 149 Diagnostics connection ...... 23 Cooling Digital radio see Climate control Audio-System ...... 108 Cooling with air dehumidification Displaying services (Media- Automatic climate control ...... 90 System) ...... 119 Copyright ...... 27 EPG (Electronic Programme Cornering light function ...... 80 Guide) (Media-System) ...... 119 Cover (front) Frequency range (Audio-Sys- see Service cover tem) ...... 107 Crosswind Assist ...... 53 Intellitext™ (Media-System) ...... 119 Cruise control Introducing (Audio-System) ...... 108 Activating ...... 69 Media-System ...... 118 Buttons ...... 69 Setting interruption for news Calling up the speed last stored .... 69 (Audio-System) ...... 108 Cancelling cruise control ...... 69 Slide show (Media-System) ...... 119 Deactivating ...... 69 Digital speedometer Display message (colour dis- Displaying ...... 103 play) ...... 195 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message (monochrome Driving abroad ...... 81 display) ...... 195 Replacing bulbs ...... 172 Function/notes ...... 68 8 Index

Switching on/off ...... 79 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 67 Display Speed limiter ...... 68 Colour ...... 99 Driving tips Monochrome ...... 99 Aquaplaning ...... 67 Display message Brakes ...... 66 Colour display ...... 102 Downhill gradient ...... 66 Display messages Driving in winter ...... 67 General information ...... 179 Driving on flooded roads ...... 67 Disposal of old devices ...... 73 Driving on wet roads ...... 67 Distance recorder Icy road surfaces ...... 67 Monochrome display ...... 100 Limited braking efficiency on Distance recorder salted roads ...... 66 see Trip meter Pulling away ...... 59 Door Symmetrical dipped beam ...... 81 Automatic locking (switch) ...... 84 see Economical driving Central locking/unlocking (key) .... 97 Dynamic handling control system Control panel ...... 32 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Display message ...... 180 Program) Emergency locking ...... 177 Emergency unlocking ...... 177 E Opening (from the inside) ...... 84 Unlocking (key) ...... 54 EBD (electronic brake force distri- Double lock function ...... 84 bution) Draught stop Function/notes ...... 53 Inserting and removing ...... 89 Indicator lamp ...... 188 Driver's door ECO mode see Door Switching on/off ...... 63 Driver's seat eco score see Seat Calling up ...... 65 Driving abroad Comparing the trip ...... 65 Symmetrical dipped beam ...... 81 Display (colour display) ...... 65 Driving noise Display (monochrome display) ...... 65 see Acoustic presence indicator Evaluating the current trip ...... 65 Driving safety system Function/notes ...... 64 Active Brake Assist ...... 51 Resetting data ...... 66 Crosswind Assist ...... 53 Saving the trip ...... 65 Driving safety system limita- Economical driving tions ...... 51 eco score display ...... 64 EBD (electronic brake force dis- General information ...... 63 tribution) ...... 53 Electrical fuses Driving safety systems see Fuses ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 51 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ...... 22 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Electronic Brake-force Distribution gram) ...... 53 see EBD (electronic brake force ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- distribution) tem) ...... 53 Driving systems Cruise control ...... 68 Index 9

Electronic Stability Program ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...... 53 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Exterior lighting Program) Cleaning ...... 161 Electronic Traction System see Lights see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Exterior mirrors Emergency assistance system Adjusting ...... 58 Automatic emergency call ...... 165 Out of position (troubleshoot- Button in the overhead control ing) ...... 180 panel ...... 164 External audio equipment (AUX) Manual emergency call ...... 165 Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 112 Overview ...... 164 External data carriers Requirements ...... 164 Connection (Media-System) ...... 125 Transmitted data ...... 164 Operation (Media-System) ...... 125 Emergency release External data storage media Driver's door ...... 177 Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 105 Emergency unlocking Operating (Audio-System) ...... 111 Vehicle ...... 177 Energy F Displaying the current con- Factory settings sumption (colour display) ...... 101 Resetting (Media-System) ...... 116 Energy consumption Favourites High-voltage battery ...... 72 Creating (Media-System) ...... 117 Energy flow display Managing (Media-System) ...... 117 Calling up (Media-System) ...... 119 Fire extinguisher ...... 167 Colour display ...... 101 First-aid kit ...... 166 Engine Fitting a wheel Starting problems ...... 182 Fitting a wheel ...... 153 Starting the engine with the key .. 59 Preparing the vehicle ...... 152 Stopping ...... 95 Raising the vehicle ...... 152 Engine electronics Removing a wheel ...... 152 Notes ...... 21 Securing the vehicle against Entering a destination rolling away ...... 166 Navigation ...... 128 Fitting/removing Environmental protection front wheel arch cover ...... 173 High-voltage battery ...... 20 Flat tyre Returning an end-of-life vehi- Preparing the vehicle ...... 164 cle ...... 20 TIREFIT kit ...... 167 EPG (Electronic Program Guide) Floormat ...... 93 Displaying (Audio-System) ...... 109 Foglamps EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Switching on/off ...... 80 Displaying (Media-System) ...... 119 ® Fording ESP (Electronic Stability Program) On flooded roads ...... 67 Crosswind Assist ...... 53 Forward collision warning function Display message ...... 189 Function/notes ...... 52 General notes ...... 53 Frequencies Important safety guidelines ...... 53 Mobile phone ...... 206 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 189 Two-way radio ...... 206 10 Index

Front airbag ...... 38 Display message ...... 196 Front cover Energy consumption ...... 72 see Service cover Important safety notes ...... 69 Front wheel arch Indicator lamp (vehicle socket) ..... 74 Fitting/removing the cover ...... 173 Method of operation ...... 72 Front-passenger front airbag deac- Outside temperatures ...... 72 tivation system Problems during charging ...... 185 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Protective equipment ...... 73 lamps ...... 39 Range ...... 72 Status indicator ...... 39 READY indicator ...... 196 Front-passenger seat Terms of use ...... 73 see Seat Vehicle socket ...... 74 Frontal area cover Warning and indicator lamps ...... 196 see Service cover High-voltage electrical system Fuses Automatic switch-off ...... 25 Allocation chart ...... 203 Danger of electric shock ...... 24 Before changing ...... 175 Operating safety ...... 24 Dashboard fuse box ...... 175 Vehicle fire ...... 25 Important safety notes ...... 175 Home address Opening the fuse box ...... 175 Entering and saving ...... 129 Home address (navigation) G see Home address Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...... 20 I Glove compartment ...... 142 i-Traffic H Traffic announcements ...... 119 i‑Size child seat securing systems ...... 42 Hand brake Ice warning see Parking brake Warning lamp (colour display) .... 195 Hands-free system Warning lamp (monochrome see Mobile phone display) ...... 195 Hazard warning lamps Ignition lock Switching on/off ...... 164 see Key positions Headbag ...... 38 Image Headlamp flasher ...... 80 Playback (Media-System) ...... 126 Headlamps Immobiliser ...... 98 see Automatic headlamp mode Indicator and warning lamp Heating Restraint system ...... 181 see Climate control Indicator and warning lamps High-voltage battery Battery ...... 196 Battery care ...... 73 Indicator lamps Charge level ...... 64 see Warning and indicator lamps Charge level display ...... 64 Instrument cluster Charging (charging station) ...... 74 Overview ...... 33 Charging (mains socket) ...... 78 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 33 Charging (wallbox) ...... 74 Instrument cluster lighting Charging cable heating up ...... 73 Setting ...... 103 Discharged battery ...... 72 Index 11

Instrument lighting Language (on-board computer) ...... 104 see Instrument cluster lighting Licence plate lighting Intellitext™ Changing bulbs ...... 174 Setting (Media-System) ...... 119 Light Switching on (Audio-System) ...... 109 see Replacing bulbs Interior lighting ...... 81 Lighting Adjusting the ambient lighting see Lights (colour display) ...... 81 Lights Changing bulbs ...... 175 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 79 Setting the ambient lighting ...... 103 Cornering light function ...... 80 Switching on/off ...... 81 Dipped-beam headlamps ...... 79 Intermittent wipe ...... 82 Display message ...... 197 ISOFIX child seat securing system ...... 42 Driving abroad ...... 81 Foglamps ...... 80 J Hazard warning lamps ...... 164 Headlamp flasher ...... 80 Jack Headlamp range ...... 80 Using ...... 152 Light switch ...... 79 Main-beam headlamps ...... 79 K Rear foglamp ...... 80 Key Setting the ambient lighting ...... 103 Changing the battery ...... 176 Side lamps ...... 80 Loss ...... 179 Turn signals ...... 62 Opening the soft top ...... 87 see Interior lighting Position in the ignition lock ...... 59 Limiter Problem (malfunction) ...... 179 Calling up the stored limit Starting the engine ...... 59 speed ...... 69 Key positions (ignition lock) ...... 59 Cancelling ...... 69 Keyboard Deactivating ...... 69 Adjusting (Media-System) ...... 115 Display message (colour dis- Kickdown ...... 61 play) ...... 195 Kneebag ...... 38 Exceeding the stored limit speed ...... 68 L General notes ...... 68 Increasing or reducing the Lamps stored limit speed ...... 69 see Warning and indicator lamps Limiting the speed Lane Keeping Assist see Speed limiter Activating/deactivating ...... 68 Loading guidelines ...... 142 Function/information ...... 67 Locking Warning lamp (colour display) .... 195 see Central locking Warning lamp (monochrome Locking (doors) display) ...... 195 Automatic ...... 84 Lane recognition system (auto- Emergency locking ...... 177 matic) From inside (central locking see Lane Keeping Assist button) ...... 84 Language Loudspeaker Selecting (Media-System) ...... 115 see Subwoofer 12 Index

M Warranty ...... 21 Message memory (colour display) ...... 102 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...... 156 MirrorLink™ Main-beam headlamps Using ...... 122 Replacing bulbs ...... 172 Mirrors Switching on/off ...... 79 see Exterior mirrors Making a call see Rear-view mirror Media-System ...... 121 Mobile phone Malfunction message Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 109 see Display message Connecting (Media-System) ...... 120 Manually releasing the selector Downloading data automati- lever lock (automatic transmission) ... 172 cally (Media-System) ...... 121 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .... 158 Frequencies ...... 206 Media-System Installation ...... 206 Adjusting the on-screen key- Loading and updating the tele- board ...... 115 phone book (Audio-System) ...... 109 Buttons on the multifunction Making a call (Media-System) ..... 121 steering wheel ...... 113 Setting the sound (Audio-Sys- Calling up menus ...... 115 tem) ...... 110 Connectivity manager ...... 138 Transmission output (maxi- Consumption details ...... 120 mum) ...... 206 Controls ...... 113 Using Android Auto™ ...... 123 Creating favourites ...... 117 Using MirrorLink™ ...... 122 Data connectivity ...... 137 Using voice control (Audio- Display settings ...... 115 System) ...... 111 eco score ...... 65 Using voice control (Media- Enabling data sharing ...... 138 System) ...... 124 Energy flow display ...... 119 Model series Home screen ...... 114 see Vehicle identification plate Image playback ...... 126 Multi-functional seat Installing apps ...... 137 see Seat Navigation menu ...... 127 Multifunction steering wheel Navigation system ...... 127 Overview ...... 29 Operating the radio ...... 118 Overview ...... 113 N Problem solving ...... 198 Reversing camera ...... 95 Navigation Selecting the home screen dis- Alternative route ...... 131 play ...... 116 Changing the route ...... 131 Selecting the language ...... 115 Current location ...... 134 Setting the time ...... 116 Destination memory ...... 129 Setting warning tones ...... 117 Displaying the reachability Status and information ...... 116 map ...... 134 Switching on/off ...... 114 Entering a charging station as a System menu ...... 115 destination ...... 129 System settings ...... 115 Entering a destination ...... 128 Video playback ...... 127 Entering a destination by Volume/tone settings ...... 116 address ...... 128 Index 13

Entering a destination using On-board diagnostics interface geo-coordinates ...... 129 see Diagnostics connection Entering a destination using On-screen keyboard the map ...... 128 Adjusting (Media-System) ...... 115 Entering a POI ...... 129 Online access ...... 139 Entering/saving your home Operating instructions address ...... 129 Vehicle equipment ...... 21 Reading map data ...... 127 Operating safety Route details ...... 131 Declaration of conformity ...... 22 Selecting a destination from the High-voltage electrical system ..... 24 list of last destinations ...... 129 Operating system Setting route planning ...... 132 see On-board computer Setting the voice ...... 136 Outside temperature display Starting ...... 127 Colour display ...... 99 Starting route calculation ...... 130 Monochrome display ...... 99 Switching announcements Setting the units ...... 103 on/off ...... 132 Outside temperatures System settings ...... 136 High-voltage battery ...... 72 TomTom Services ...... 134 Overhead control panel ...... 31 Traffic information ...... 133 Overvoltage protection Troubleshooting ...... 198 High-voltage battery ...... 73 Way points ...... 131 P O Paint code ...... 200 Occupant safety Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 161 Airbags ...... 38 Park brake Belt warning ...... 37 see Parking brake Children in the vehicle ...... 40 Parking ...... 95 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator Engaging park position ...... 61 lamp ...... 39 Important safety notes ...... 95 Pets in the vehicle ...... 51 Parking aid ...... 95 Restraint system ...... 34 Parking brake ...... 60 Restraint system warning lamp .... 34 Reversing camera ...... 95 Seat belts ...... 36 Parking brake On-board computer Display message ...... 183 Calling up displays (colour dis- General information ...... 60 play) ...... 100 Warning lamp ...... 183 Calling up displays (mono- PASSENGER AIR BAG chrome display) ...... 100 Disabling/activating ...... 44 Important safety notes ...... 99 Indicator lamps ...... 39 Operation ...... 99 Passenger airbag Overview ...... 99 Enabling and disabling* ...... 44 Selecting the language ...... 104 Problem (malfunction)* ...... 181 Setting and resetting values Passenger seat (colour display) ...... 102 Folding down ...... 144 Setting and resetting values Pets in the vehicle ...... 51 (monochrome display) ...... 102 Power display ...... 64 14 Index

Power windows Range see Side windows High-voltage battery ...... 72 Pre-entry climate control and RBS charging see Radar-based recuperation Colour display ...... 102 Reading lamp ...... 81 Pre-entry climate control at depar- Rear foglamp ture time Replacing bulbs ...... 173 Smart-Charging ...... 91 Switching on/off ...... 80 Pre-entry climate control at time of Rear lamp departure Replacing bulbs ...... 173 Setting departure time ...... 91 Rear parking aid Protection against theft Activating/deactivating ...... 95 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 98 Function/notes ...... 95 Protection of the environment Rear soft top General notes ...... 20 Closing ...... 143 Pulling away Opening ...... 143 General notes ...... 59 Rear window heating Hill start assist ...... 61 Demisting the rear window (automatic climate control) ...... 91 Q Rear window wiper Automatic rear window wiper QR code when in reverse gear ...... 82 Rescue card ...... 25 Replacing the wiper blade ...... 158 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 24 Switching on/off ...... 82 Rear-view mirror ...... 57 R Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ...... 57 Radar-based recuperation Dipping (manual) ...... 57 Function/notes ...... 62 Recharging cable Switching off/on (on-board Indicator lamp ...... 75 computer with colour display) ..... 103 Recuperation (radar based) Radio Function/notes ...... 62 Display mode ...... 118 Recuperation (radar-based) Displaying programme infor- Switching on and off (colour mation (EPG) (Audio-System) ...... 109 display) ...... 103 i-Traffic (Traffic announce- Recycling ments) ...... 119 see Protection of the environment Operating (Audio-System) ...... 107 Remote configuration Operation (Media-System) ...... 118 smart control ...... 139 Radio text Remote query functions Displaying (Audio-System) ...... 108 smart control ...... 139 Displaying (Media-System) ...... 119 Replacing bulbs Radio type approvals Brake lamp ...... 173 Tyre pressure monitors ...... 205 Dipped-beam headlamps ...... 172 Radio-based vehicle components Fitting/removing the cover Declaration of conformity ...... 22 (front wheel arch) ...... 173 Rain sensor ...... 82 Important safety notes ...... 172 Rain/light sensor (display message) .. 196 LED ...... 174 Licence plate lighting ...... 174 Index 15

Main-beam headlamps ...... 172 SD card Overview of bulb types ...... 202 Connecting (Media-System) ...... 125 Rear foglamp ...... 173 Reading map data ...... 127 Rear lamp ...... 173 SD card slot ...... 113 Reversing lamp ...... 173 Seat Turn signal lamp (rear) ...... 173 Correct driver's seat position ...... 54 see Changing bulbs Folding passenger seat down ...... 144 Replacing lamps Seat belt see Changing bulbs Limited protection ...... 36 Replacing the bulb Protection provided ...... 36 Turn signal lamp (front) ...... 173 Seat belts Replacing the bulbs Cleaning ...... 161 Interior lighting ...... 175 Fastening ...... 37 Rescue card ...... 25 Releasing ...... 37 Restraint system Warning lamp ...... 181 Display message ...... 181 Warning lamp (function) ...... 37 Function during an accident ...... 35 Seat heating ...... 92 Limited protection ...... 34 Seats Malfunction ...... 34 Adjusting (manually) ...... 55 Operational readiness ...... 34 Cleaning the cover ...... 162 Protection provided ...... 34 Important safety notes ...... 55 System self-test ...... 34 Switching seat heating on/off ...... 92 Warning lamp ...... 181 Selector lever Warning lamp (function) ...... 34 Cleaning ...... 161 Reverse gear Selector lever Engaging (automatic transmis- see Automatic transmission sion) ...... 61 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 160 Reversing camera Service Centre Cleaning instructions ...... 159 see Qualified specialist workshop Function/notes ...... 96 Service cover ...... 147 Guide lines in the display ...... 96 Service display Settings ...... 97 Calling up (colour display) ...... 102 Switching on/off ...... 97 Calling up (monochrome dis- Reversing feature play) ...... 100 Side windows ...... 85 Service due date Reversing lamp Display message ...... 184 Replacing bulbs ...... 173 Service products Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Brake fluid ...... 202 instructions) ...... 162 Coolant (engine) ...... 149 Important safety notes ...... 149 S Washer fluid ...... 202 Setting the charge current Safety Charging cable version 2 ...... 77 Children in the vehicle ...... 40 Side bars see Occupant safety Closing the stowage space ...... 89 see Operating safety Stowing ...... 87 Safety system Side lamps see Driving safety system Switching on/off ...... 80 16 Index

Side spars Speakers Fitting ...... 88 see Subwoofer Removing ...... 87 Special destination Side windows Entry ...... 129 Important safety notes ...... 85 Specialist workshop ...... 24 Opening/closing ...... 86 Speed limiter Problem (malfunction) ...... 180 Activating ...... 69 Resetting ...... 180 Functions and conditions for Reversing feature ...... 85 activation ...... 68 Sidebag ...... 38 Setting limit speed ...... 69 smart Centre Speedometer see Qualified specialist workshop Digital ...... 99 smart control Displaying (digital speedome- Internet ...... 139 ter) ...... 103 smart Services General notes (digital speed- Registering ...... 139 ometer) ...... 102 Using ...... 139 see Instrument cluster Smart-Charging Starting (engine) ...... 59 Function/notes ...... 91 Starting the engine Smartphone see Starting (engine) Fitting the bracket ...... 106 Station Inserting/removing ...... 106 Selecting a stored station Operating the Audio-System (Audio-System) ...... 108 via the mobile phone ...... 106 Setting (Media-System) ...... 118 Smartphone Screen Station list Setting (Media -System) ...... 122 Setting a station from the sta- Snow chains ...... 157 tion list (Audio-System) ...... 108 Socket (12 V) Updating (Media-System) ...... 119 Centre console ...... 93 Station search Socket (high-voltage battery) Audio-System ...... 108 see Vehicle socket Stations Soft top Setting (Audio-System) ...... 107 Cleaning ...... 161 Storing (Audio-System) ...... 108 Closing ...... 87 Steering Closing the rear soft top ...... 143 Display message (colour dis- Closing the stowage space play) ...... 193 without the side bars ...... 89 Warning lamps ...... 193 Important safety notes ...... 86 Steering wheel Opening ...... 87 Adjusting (manually) ...... 56 Opening the rear soft top ...... 143 Button overview ...... 29 Removing the side bars ...... 87 Cleaning ...... 161 Stowing the side bars ...... 87 Important safety notes ...... 56 Sound Steering wheel heating Setting (Audio-System) ...... 107 Switching on/off ...... 92 Setting (Media-System) ...... 116 Stowage areas ...... 141 Sound generator Stowage compartment in the tail- see Acoustic presence indicator gate ...... 142 Index 17

Stowage compartments Setting the display unit ...... 103 Centre console ...... 141 Touchscreen Cup holder ...... 141 Confirming settings with Done .... 115 Door ...... 141 Operating the touchscreen ...... 114 Glove compartment ...... 141 Towing Important safety information ...... 141 Important safety notes ...... 170 Spectacles compartment ...... 141 Towing away Subwoofer Fitting the towing eye ...... 171 Fitting/removing ...... 147 Removing the towing eye ...... 171 Sun visor ...... 83 With both axles on the ground ..... 171 Traction system T see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Traffic reports Tailgate Switching on/off ...... 108 Opening dimensions ...... 200 Transmission Opening/closing ...... 143 see Automatic transmission Warning lamp ...... 180 Transporting the vehicle ...... 171 Tailgate (smart fortwo cabrio) Trip computer Opening/closing ...... 143 Displaying ...... 101 Technical data Trip meter Information ...... 200 Colour display ...... 101 Vehicle data ...... 200 Displaying (colour display) ...... 101 Telephone book Displaying (monochrome dis- Loading (Audio-System) ...... 109 play) ...... 100 Telephone operation Trip meter Audio-System ...... 110 see Trip meter Temperature Turn signal lamp (front) Setting (automatic climate con- Replacing the bulb ...... 173 trol) ...... 90 Turn signal lamp (rear) Time Replacing bulbs ...... 173 Setting (Audio-System) ...... 107 Turn signals Setting (colour display) ...... 103 Replacing the bulb ...... 173 Setting (monochrome display) ..... 102 Switching on/off ...... 62 Setting the time format (colour Turn signals display) ...... 103 see Turn signals TIREFIT kit ...... 167 Two-way radio TomTom Services Frequencies ...... 206 Activating ...... 134 Installation ...... 206 Introduction ...... 134 Transmission output (maxi- My Services menu ...... 135 mum) ...... 206 Subscription status ...... 135 Type identification plate Traffic information menu ...... 135 see Vehicle identification plate Tool Tyre pressure see Vehicle tool kit Checking/correcting ...... 156 Top Tether ...... 43 Display message ...... 190 Total distance recorder Important safety notes ...... 155 Colour display ...... 101 Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 169 Monochrome display ...... 99 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 169 18 Index

Recommended ...... 155 Implied warranty ...... 25 Tyre pressure monitor Locking (in an emergency) ...... 177 Function/notes ...... 154 Locking (key) ...... 97 Radio type approval for the tyre Operating safety ...... 21 pressure monitor ...... 205 Parking up ...... 163 Restarting ...... 154 Raising ...... 152 Starting ...... 103 Registration ...... 24 Warning lamp ...... 190 Remote configuration ...... 139 Tyres Remote query functions ...... 139 Changing a wheel ...... 151 Securing from rolling away ...... 166 Checking ...... 150 Towing away ...... 170 Direction of rotation ...... 153 Transporting ...... 171 Important safety notes ...... 150 Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 177 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...... 156 Unlocking (key) ...... 54 Rules for new tyres ...... 151 Vehicle data ...... 200 Service life ...... 151 Vehicle data ...... 200 Snow chains ...... 157 Vehicle dimensions ...... 200 Storing ...... 154 Vehicle emergency locking ...... 177 Tyre tread ...... 150 Vehicle identification number see Flat tyre see VIN Vehicle identification plate ...... 200 U Vehicle key see Key Unit of measurement for distance Vehicle socket Setting ...... 103 High-voltage battery ...... 74 Units Indicator lamp ...... 74 Setting (on-board computer) ...... 103 Problems during the charging Unlocking process ...... 185 From inside the vehicle (central Vehicle tool kit ...... 167 unlocking button) ...... 84 Ventilation With emergency key element ...... 177 see Air conditioning USB device Video Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 111 Playback (Media-System) ...... 127 Connection (Media-System) ...... 125 VIN ...... 200 Operating (Audio-System) ...... 111 Voice control system USB port Entering a destination in the Audio-System ...... 105 navigation system ...... 128 Media-System ...... 113 Problems with the voice control system ...... 199 V Starting an application ...... 113 Values Voltage range Setting (colour display) ...... 102 High-voltage battery ...... 72 Setting (monochrome display) ..... 102 Volume Vehicle Adjusting automatically ...... 107 Correct use ...... 25 Setting (Audio-System) ...... 107 Data acquisition ...... 25 Setting (Media-System) ...... 116 Electronics ...... 21 Equipment ...... 21 Index 19

W Switching on/off ...... 81 Wiping with washer fluid ...... 82 Warning and indicator lamps Wing ABS ...... 188 see Front wheel arch Active Brake Assist ...... 193 Winter driving Brakes ...... 183 General notes ...... 67 Collision warning (red) ...... 193 Winter operation EBD ...... 188 Slippery road surfaces ...... 67 ® ESP (yellow) ...... 189 Snow chains ...... 157 High-voltage battery ...... 196 Winter tyres Lane Keeping Assist ...... 194 M+S tyres ...... 156 Overview ...... 33 Wiper blades Parking brake ...... 183 Cleaning ...... 160 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...... 39 Replacing (on the rear window) ... 158 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ...... 181 Replacing (windscreen) ...... 157 Seat belt ...... 181 Workshop Steering ...... 193 see Qualified specialist workshop Tyre pressure monitor ...... 190 Warning triangle ...... 166 Wheel bolt tightening torque ...... 153 Wheels Changing a wheel ...... 151 Checking ...... 150 Cleaning ...... 160 Fitting a new wheel ...... 153 Important safety notes ...... 150 Removing a wheel ...... 152 Snow chains ...... 157 Storing ...... 154 Tightening torque ...... 153 Windowbag ...... 38 Windows Cleaning ...... 160 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting (automatic climate control) ...... 90 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes ...... 150 Topping up ...... 150 Windscreen wipers Intermittent wipe ...... 82 Problem (malfunction) ...... 180 Rain sensor ...... 82 Rear window wiper ...... 82 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 157 20 >> Introduction.

Protecting the environment High-voltage battery

General notes H Environmental note Have a defective high-voltage battery dis- Environmental note H posed of in an environmentally-responsi- Daimler's declared policy is one of com- ble manner. Contact a specialist workshop prehensive environmental protection. that is qualified to work on smart electric Our objectives are to use the natural drive vehicles and has the necessary spe- resources which form the basis of our exis- cialist knowledge and tools to carry out the tence on this planet sparingly and in a work required. smart recommends that you manner which takes the requirements of use a smart Centre for this purpose. both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environ- Returning an end-of-life vehicle ment by operating your vehicle in an envi- EU countries only: ronmentally-responsible manner. smart will take back your end-of-life vehicle Energy consumption and the rate of for environment-friendly disposal in engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear accordance with the European Union (EU) depend on the following factors: End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive. Roperating conditions of your vehicle This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving Ryour personal driving style resources. A network of vehicle take-back You can influence both factors. Therefore, points and dismantlers has been established please bear the following in mind: for you to return your vehicle. Returning vehicles to these facilities is free of charge. Operating conditions: For further information about the recycling Robserve the correct tyre pressure. and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in take-back conditions, please visit the national smart website for your country. the vehicle Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. smart genuine parts Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You Environmental note should therefore adhere to the service H Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned intervals. assemblies and parts which are of the same Rall maintenance work should be carried quality as new parts. For these, the same out at a qualified specialist workshop. warranty applies as for new parts. Personal driving style: Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- ! as control units and sensors for these tance from the vehicle in front. restraint systems, may be installed in the Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and following areas of your vehicle: braking. Rdoors Rmonitor the vehicle's energy consump- Rdoor pillars tion. Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard >> Introduction. 21

Rinstrument cluster Warranty for the smart Audio-System Rcentre console and smart Media-System Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out The smart sales organisation provides a war- repairs or welding. You could impair the ranty for a period of 24 months without a kil- operating efficiency of the restraint sys- ometre limit for the smart Audio-System and tems. the smart Media-System. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified The warranty issuer is the respective sales specialist workshop. organisation in the country in which the Only smart genuine parts or parts of the same accessory or replacement part was pur- quality may be used. Additionally, only chased (see list in the service booklet). tyres, wheels and accessories approved for the specific type of vehicle may be used. Always specify the vehicle identification Vehicle equipment number (VIN) when ordering smart genuine parts. This Owner's Manual describes all models Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevant and all standard and optional equipment equipment not approved by smart could available for the vehicle at the time of pub- endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. lication of this Owner's Manual. Country- Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys- specific differences are possible. Please note tem, could malfunction. that the vehicle equipment may differ from smart tests genuine parts and conversion certain descriptions and illustrations provi- parts and accessories that have been specif- ded in this manual. This is also the case for ically approved for your vehicle for their systems and functions relevant to safety. reliability, safety and suitability. Despite The vehicle's original purchase contract ongoing market research, smart is unable to documentation contains a list of all the sys- assess other parts. smart therefore accepts tems in your vehicle. Please contact any no responsibility for the use of such parts in smart centre to help clarify any questions smart vehicles, even if they have been offi- related to the vehicle equipment and opera- cially approved or independently approved tion. by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if Operating safety they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All gen- Important safety notes uine smart parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may G WARNING invalidate the vehicle's general operating If you do not have the prescribed service/ permit. maintenance work or necessary repairs The following situations will invalidate the carried out, this could result in malfunc- operating permit: tions or system failures. There is a risk of RThe vehicle type changes from that stated an accident. in the vehicle's operating permit, due to modifications. Always have the prescribed service/main- ROther road users are likely to be endan- tenance work as well as necessary repairs gered. carried out at a qualified specialist work- REmissions or noise characteristics deteri- shop. orate. G WARNING If you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle

Z 22 >> Introduction.

when driving, you could be distracted from ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: the traffic situation. This could also cause Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a kerb or an unpaved road risk of an accident. Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a Only operate this equipment when the kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road traffic situation permits. If you cannot be Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- parts of the chassis tion to road and traffic conditions and In situations like this, the body, the under- operate the equipment with the vehicle body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could stationary. be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way G WARNING can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an Modifications to electronic components, accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. their software as well as wiring could In such situations, have the vehicle affect their function and/or the operation checked and repaired immediately at a of other networked components. This could qualified specialist workshop. If on con- in particular also be the case for systems tinuing your journey you notice that driv- relevant to safety. They might not function ing safety is impaired, pull over and stop properly anymore and/or jeopardise the the vehicle immediately, paying attention operational safety of the vehicle. There is to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist work- an increased risk of an accident and injury. shop. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well The multimedia device is equipped with as electronic components or their software. technical provisions to protect it against Always have work on electrical and elec- theft. Further information is available from tronic components carried out at a quali- any smart centre. fied specialist workshop. The functionality of a roof aerial (radio, DAB) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you Metallised retrofit film on windows may also are inattentive, the driving safety systems affect radio and GPS reception and have a can neither reduce the risk of accident nor negative impact on all other aerial functions override the laws of physics. Driving safety in the vehicle interior. systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and Declarations of conformity for staying in lane. The driving style should Electromagnetic compatibility always be adjusted to the current street and weather conditions. An adequate safe dis- The electromagnetic compatibility of the tance must be maintained at all times. vehicle components has been checked and You must observe the legal requirements for certified according to the currently valid the country in which you are currently driv- version of Regulation ECE-R 10. ing when operating information systems and communication devices integrated into the Declaration of conformity for two-way vehicle. radio systems according to Directive If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- 2014/53/EU tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid. The components of the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other >> Introduction. 23 relevant regulations stipulated by Directive Type of radio device in the vehicle 2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from any Frequency Technology Transmis- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. range sion output/ In the following, you will find the addresses magnetic of radio component manufacturers which, field due to their size or nature, do not allow this strength information to be indicated on the equip- 125 kHz Trans- ≤ 42 dBμA/m ment. (119 – ponder ring at 10 m Tyre pressure monitor sensors: Schrader 135 kHz) Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland 13.553 – Windshield ≤ 42 dBμA/m Transponder ring: 13.567 MHz Unit (Vehi- at 10 m Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, cle access Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, system for Tunisia Car2Go) Remote keyless entry: 433 MHz Remote key- ≤ 10 mW Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, (433.05 – less entry e.r.p. Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, 434.79 MHz) Tyre pres- Tunisia sure monitor Alps Electric Europe GmbH, Ohmstrasse 4, D-85716 Unterschleissheim, Germany 2.4 GHz ISM Bluetooth ≤ 100 mW waveband e.i.r.p. Radio: (2400 – Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, 2483.5 MHz) Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia 76 - 77 GHz 76 GHz Radar ≤ 55 dBm Continental Automotive, 1 Rue de Clairefon- peak e.i.r.p. taine, 78120 Rambouillet, France Mobile communication and telemetry: Ficosa Internationnal, Gran Via de Carles III Diagnostics connection 98, 08028 Barcelona, Spain The diagnostics connection is only intended Radar: for the connection of diagnostic equipment Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229 at a qualified specialist workshop. Leonberg, Germany Windscreen unit: G WARNING car2go Group GmbH, Fasanenweg 15-17, If you connect equipment to a diagnostics 70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen, Germany connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz.

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises

Z 24 >> Introduction.

the operating and road safety of the vehi- In the following cases, it is possible that a cle. There is a risk of an accident. vehicle has not yet been registered in the owner's name: Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so Rthe vehicle was not purchased at an that they do not get into the driver's foot- authorised specialist dealer well. Always fit the floormats securely and Rthe vehicle has not yet been examined at a as prescribed in order to ensure that there smart centre is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do smart recommends registering the vehicle in not use loose floormats and do not place a smart centre. several floormats on top of one another. Notify smart as soon as possible if there is a change of address or if ownership of the ! If the engine is switched off and a device vehicles changes. This can be done at a smart is connected to a diagnostic connection, centre, for example. the battery may become discharged.

High-voltage electrical system Qualified specialist workshop Danger of electric shock A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications DANGER to correctly carry out any necessary work on G your vehicle. This particularly applies to The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys- work relevant to safety. tem is under high voltage. If you modify Observe the information contained in the components in the vehicle's high-voltage Service Booklet. electrical system or touch damaged com- Always have the following work carried out ponents, you may be electrocuted. The on your vehicle at a smart centre: components in the vehicle's high-voltage Rwork relevant to safety electrical system may be damaged in an Rservice and maintenance work accident, although the damage is not visi- Rrepair work ble. There is a risk of fatal injury. Rmodifications, installations and conver- Do not touch any high-voltage components sions after an accident and never modify the Rwork on electronic components vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Rreplacing the 12 V battery within the pre- Have the vehicle towed away after an acci- scribed interval, at the latest every three dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec- years trical system checked by a qualified spe- You can obtain current information concern- cialist workshop. ing the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart centre.

Vehicle registration smart may ask its smart centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. smart is only able to notify the vehicle owner about vehicle inspections if smart has the vehicle registration data. >> Introduction. 25

All of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical splashes off with water and seek medical system components are marked with yellow attention straight away. warning stickers which warn you of the dangers of high voltages. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in colour. Correct use Observe the following before carrying out general work such as changing a bulb or If warning stickers are removed, you may fail checking the coolant level: to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in place. Rthe ignition is switched off The following are important sources of infor- Rthe charging cable for charging the high- mation in regard to vehicle use: voltage battery is disconnected Rsafety notes in this Owner's Manual Rtechnical data in this Owner's Manual Automatically switching off the vehicle's Rtraffic rules and regulations high-voltage electrical system Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to In order to prevent anyone coming into con- motor vehicles tact with high voltage, the high-voltage electrical system is generally switched off automatically in the following cases: Implied warranty Rthe restraint systems are activated in the event of an accident ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle Ran electrical short circuit is detected in the as well as about possible vehicle damage. vehicle's high-voltage electrical system Damage to your vehicle that arises from Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's culpable contraventions against these high-voltage electrical system is discon- instructions is not covered either by the nected smart implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. High-voltage battery

G WARNING QR codes for rescue card In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery could The QR code is affixed on the charge socket exceed a critical value. In this case, flam- flap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on the mable gas escapes through a vent valve in opposite side. In the event of an accident, the vehicle's underbody. The gas can rescue services can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding rescue ignite. There is a risk of injury. card for a vehicle. The current rescue card Leave the danger area immediately. Secure contains the most important information the danger area at a suitable distance, about the vehicle in compact form, such as whilst observing legal requirements. the routing of the electric cables. Further information: www.mercedes-benz.de/qr- code G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases Data stored in the vehicle may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Information from electronic control Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- units ing. Immediately rinse electrolyte Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control units. Some of them are necessary for your vehicle to function safely, some provide

Z 26 >> Introduction.

support when driving (driver assistance bility. For this purpose, the manufacturer systems). In addition, your vehicle offers requires technical data from vehicles. comfort or entertainment functions which Error memories in the vehicle can be reset by are also made possible with electronic con- a service outlet during repairs or service trol units. work. Electronic control units contain data memo- Depending on the equipment selected, you ries which can permanently or temporarily can enter data in comfort and infotainment store technical information on vehicle con- functions of the vehicle. dition, component stress, service require- This includes, for example: ments as well as technical incidents and faults. Rmultimedia data, such as music, films or This information generally documents the photos for playback in an integrated mul- condition of a component, a module, a system timedia system or of the environment such as: Raddress book data for use in an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navi- Roperating states of system components gation system (e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pressure) Rnavigation destinations entered Rstatus messages of the vehicle or its indi- Rdata on the use of Internet services vidual components (e.g. wheel revolu- This data can be saved locally in the vehicle tions/speed, deceleration in movement, or it is located on a device which you have lateral acceleration, display of seat belts connected to the vehicle. As long as this data fastened) is saved in the vehicle, you can delete it at Rmalfunctions and defects in key system any time. Transfer of this data to third par- components (e.g. the lights and brakes) ties only occurs at your request, especially as part of online services according to the Rinformation on incidents in which the settings you have selected. vehicle is damaged You can save comfort settings/individuali- Rreactions of the systems in specific driv- sation in the vehicle and change them at any ing situations (e.g. deployment of an air- time. bag, use of stability control systems) Depending on the equipment, these include, Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain for example: sensor) In addition to the provision of control unit Rsettings for seat and steering wheel posi- functions, this data serves to detect and rec- tions tify faults as well as to optimise vehicle Rsuspension and air-conditioning settings functions by the manufacturer. Most of this Rindividualisation such as interior lighting data is volatile and is only processed in the As long as your vehicle is suitably equipped, vehicle itself. Only a small proportion of the you can connect your mobile phone or data is stored in event or error memories. another mobile end device with the vehicle. When service work is done on your vehicle, You can operate these devices via the control the technical data from the vehicle can be elements integrated in the vehicle. Images read out by service network staff or third and sound from the mobile phone can played parties. Service work is, for example, repair back via the multimedia system. At the same work, maintenance, warranty claims and time, certain information is transferred to quality assurance measures. The data is read your mobile phone. out using the legally prescribed OBD (Euro- This includes, depending on the type of inte- pean On-board Diagnostics) connector in the gration, for example: vehicle. The respective workshop of service network or third parties collect, process and Rgeneral vehicle status use the data. The data documents technical Rposition data states of the vehicle, help in finding errors This allows the use of selected mobile phone and in improving quality and are transferred apps, e.g. navigation or music playback. to the manufacturer if necessary. In addition, There is no further interaction between the manufacturer is subject to product lia- mobile phone and vehicle; in particular there >> Introduction. 27 is no active access to vehicle data. The pro- no influence on the contents exchanged vider of the app being used determines how whilst using these services. the data may be further processed. Which Please ask the respective service provider for settings you can adjust, if any, depends on details on the type, extent and purpose of the the specific app and the operating system of collection and use of personal data in the your mobile phone. context of third party services.

Service providers Copyright information Wireless network connection Information on licenses of Free and Open- In as far as your vehicle has a wireless net- Source software used in the vehicle and the work connection, this will permit the electronic components: exchange of data between your vehicle and http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource further systems. The wireless network connection is enabled by a transmission and reception device belonging to the vehicle or via mobile end devices (e.g. mobile phones) you bring into the vehicle. Online functions can be used via this wireless network connection. These include online services and applications/apps, which are provided by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's own services For online services of the manufacturer, the manufacturer describes the specific functions and the associated data protection information in an appropriate place. Per- sonal identification data may be used to provide online services. Data transfer to this end occurs via a protected connection e. g. using the IT systems of the manufacturer provided for this purpose. The collecting, processing, and use of personal identification data beyond the provision of services occurs exclusively on the basis of a legal permit or after due consent. Generally, you can enable or disable the services and functions (which sometimes have associated costs). In some cases, this also applies to the whole data connection of the vehicle. Excluded from this are special legally prescribed functions and services.

Services of third parties In as far as it is possible to use the online services of other providers, these services are subject to the responsibility as well as the data protection and terms of use of the respective provider. The manufacturer has

Z 28 Cockpit

Cockpit >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Charge level display 64 D Climate control system Power display 64 control panel 89 ; Instrument cluster 33 E Ignition lock 59 = Horn F Control panel for: Lane Keeping Assist 67 ? Instrument cluster multifunction lever 100 Parking aid 95 Windscreen wipers combi- Acoustic presence indica- nation switch 81 tor 62 Headlamp range adjust- A Automatic locking feature 84 ment 80 Hazard warning lamps 164 G Lights combination switch 79 B Overhead control panel 31 C smart Audio-System 105 smart Media-System 113 Multifunction steering wheel 29

Multifunction steering wheel >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Colour display of the A ° Calls up the last speed instrument cluster 99 stored 69 Monochrome display of the Interrupts cruise instrument cluster 99 B ± control or the limiter 69 ; smart Audio-System 105 C ¯ Activates cruise con- smart Media-System 113 trol 69 = Only for instrument cluster ^ Deactivates cruise with colour display: control or the limiter 69 WX Adjusts the vol- È Activates limiter 69 ume 113 D Only for instrument cluster Switches voice-oper- with colour display: ated control on or off and 9: Scrolls through accepts or ends a call 113 menus 100 ? ® Increases or stores a Confirms the selec- the current speed 69 tion 102 − Decreases current speed 69 30 Centre console with drawer

Centre console with drawer >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Cup holders 141 B Cigarette lighter 93 Ashtray 93 12 V socket 93 ; Drawer 141 C smart Media-System: AUX port, USB port and SD card = smart fortwo coupé: coin slot 113 holder D Cup holders 141 = smart fortwo cabrio: opens and closes the soft top 86 E Selector lever indicator 61 ? Selector lever 61 F ECO mode 63 A Parking brake 60 Overhead control panel 31

Overhead control panel >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Left-hand reading lamp 81 ? PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps 39 ; Interior lighting 81 A Rear-view mirror 57 = Right-hand reading lamp 81 32 Door control panel

Door control panel >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 84 = Opens and closes the side windows 86 ; Adjusts the exterior mirrors 58 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display 33

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Speedometer Ã Lane Keeping Assist 194 ; Display # 12 V battery 196 = Warning and indicator R Rear foglamp 80 lamps O Foglamps 80 C Doors or tailgate 180 K Main-beam headlamps 79 7 Seat belts 181 L Dipped-beam headlamps 79 6 Restraint system 181 T Side lamps 80 þ Drive diagnostics 185 è Charging cable 185 J Brakes 183 ¯ Cruise control 195 ! ABS 188 È Limiter 195 ÷ ESP® 53 b Brake lights, rain or light h Tyre pressure monitor 190 sensors 196 D Power steering 193 ¯ Next service due date · Collision warning 193 ° 184 ^ Active Brake Assist 51 õ READY indicator 196 34 Occupant safety

Occupant safety protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for exam- Restraint system ple. There is an increased risk of injury, Protection provided by the restraint sys- possibly even fatal. tem Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well The restraint system comprises: as electronic components or their software. RSeat belt system RAirbags If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, >> Safety. RChild restraint system contact a qualified specialist workshop. RChild seat securing system smart recommends that you use driving aids In the event of an accident, the restraint sys- which have been approved specifically for tem can: your vehicle by smart. Rreduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle Preparing the restraint system for oper- interior. ation Rreduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected When the ignition is switched on, the 6 Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can restraint system warning lamp lights up provide the intended level of protection. The during the self-check. It goes out no later belt tensioners and/or airbags can comple- than a few seconds after the vehicle is star- ment a correctly worn seat belt depending on ted. The components of the restraint system the detected accident situation. Belt ten- are then ready for operation. sioners and airbags are not necessarily deployed in every accident. Restraint system malfunctions For the restraint system to provide its full RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 protection, each occupant has to: does not light up when the ignition is Rhave the seat belt fastened correctly switched on. Rbe in an almost upright position with their RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 is back against the seat backrest constantly lit or lights up repeatedly when Rsit with their feet resting on the floor, if driving. possible In the event of an accident, the vehicle's Rif below 1.50 m in height, be secured using high-voltage electrical system may not be an additional restraint system suitable for deactivated as intended if there is a mal- your vehicle function in the restraint system. However, no system available today can DANGER completely eliminate injuries and fatalities G in every accident situation. In particular, If the restraint system is malfunctioning, seat belts and airbags generally do not pro- restraint system components may be trig- tect against objects penetrating the vehicle gered unintentionally or may not deploy from the outside. The risk of an injury result- as intended during an accident. This may ing from airbag deployment cannot be ruled affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for out entirely either. example. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage elec- Limited protection from restraint system trical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may be electrocuted if you G WARNING touch the damaged components of the If the restraint system is modified, it may vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended Occupant safety 35

This poses an increased risk of injury or The restraint system components can be even fatal injury. activated or triggered independently of each other: Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- components detected trigger sit- cialist workshop. After an accident, switch uation off the ignition immediately and remove belt tensioners frontal collision, the key from the ignition lock. rear collision, side impact, overturn1 Restraint system response during an driver's airbag, frontal collision accident front-passenger >> Safety. front airbag and How the restraint system works depends on kneebag the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: sidebag side impact Rfrontal collision windowbag2 or side impact, over- Rrear collision headbag3 turn1, frontal colli- Rside impact sion Roverturn1 The activation threshold for the restraint WARNING system components is determined based on G the analysis of the sensor values measured at After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts various points in the vehicle. This process is are hot. There is a risk of injury. pre-emptive in nature. The triggering proc- Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a ess of the restraint system components deployed airbag replaced at a qualified should take place in good time at the start of specialist workshop as soon as possible. the collision. Factors which can only be seen and meas- i smart recommends that you have the ured after a collision has occurred do not vehicle towed to a qualified specialist play a decisive role in the deployment of an workshop after an accident. Take this into airbag, nor do they provide an indication of account, particularly if a belt tensioner airbag deployment. was triggered or an airbag was deployed. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the If the belt tensioners are triggered or an air- case if only parts which are relatively easily bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle small amount of powder may also be deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air- released: bag may be deployed even though the vehicle Rthe bang will not usually affect your hear- suffers only minor deformation. If, for ing. instance, very rigid car parts such as longi- Rin general, the powder released is not haz- tudinal body members are hit, the rate of ardous to health but may cause short-term vehicle deceleration may be sufficient. breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

1 Only for certain countries. 2 smart fortwo coupé 3 smart fortwo cabrio

Z 36 Occupant safety

Seat belts notes on "Loading the vehicle" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 142). Protection provided by seat belts Also make sure that objects are never placed between an occupant and the seat, Always fasten seat belts correctly before e.g. a cushion. commencing your journey. A seat belt can only provide maximum protection when worn If children are travelling in the vehicle, be correctly. sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" G WARNING (Y page 40). If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it can- >> Safety. not perform its intended protective func- Limited protection from seat belts tion. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat WARNING belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in G the event of an accident, heavy braking or The seat belt does not offer the intended sudden changes of direction. There is an level of protection if you have not moved increased risk of injury, possibly even the backrest to an almost vertical position. fatal. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat Always ensure that all vehicle occupants belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, have their seat belts fastened correctly for example. This poses an increased risk of and are sitting properly. injury or even fatal injury. Always observe the notes on correct driver's Adjust the seat properly before beginning seat position (Y page 54) and seat adjust- your journey. Always ensure that the ment (Y page 55). backrest is in an almost vertical position Every car occupant must observe the follow- and that the shoulder section of your seat- ing notes to ensure a properly worn seat belt belt is routed across the centre of your can provide full protection. shoulder. RThe seat belt must: - not be twisted and must be tight and fit WARNING snugly across your body G Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the - be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across your hips as seat belts correctly without an additional possible suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is Rthe shoulder section of the belt should not worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its touch your neck nor be routed under your intended protective function. Further- arm or behind your back. more, an incorrectly worn seat belt can Ravoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event coat. of an accident, heavy braking or sudden Rpress the lap belt down into your hip joints changes of direction. There is an increased and pull taut by the shoulder section of the risk of injury, possibly even fatal. belt. The lap belt must never be routed across your stomach or abdomen. Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems. Rnever route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. Ronly one person per seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. Rnever secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the Occupant safety 37

WARNING protective function and must be replaced. G Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, Fastening and releasing the seat belt are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed If the seat belt is pulled out quickly or Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or sharply, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap extremely dirty cannot be pulled out any further. Rmodifications have been made to the belt ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia not engage the seat belt tongue in the

reels buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, >> Safety. Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam- in the event of an accident the belt tensioner could be triggered in addition to age in an accident, e.g. due to glass splint- other systems and would need to be ers. Modified or damaged seat belts can replaced. tear or fail, for example in the event of an For easy fastening, the seat belt is routed accident. Modified seat belt tensioners through the seat belt guide on the side of the may be deployed unintentionally or not driver's seat. function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you only use seat belts that have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. : Buckle G WARNING ; Belt tongue Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have X To fasten: always engage seat belt been triggered are no longer operational tongue ; into buckle : of the corre- and therefore cannot protect as intended. sponding seat. There is an increased risk of injury, pos- X To release: press the release button in belt sibly even fatal. buckle : and guide the seat belt back by belt tongue ;. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the after an accident. instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled belts correctly. up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue A warning tone may also sound. will be trapped in the door or in the seat As soon as the driver and co-driver fasten mechanism. This could damage the door, their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- out. aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their

Z 38 Occupant safety

i If you use an ISOFIX or i-Size child The front-passenger front airbag can only be restraint system on the co-driver's seat deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER where the child is not secured using the AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. If the front- seat belt from the co-driver's seat, the seat passenger seat is occupied, make sure that belt warning can be activated. In this case the status of the front-passenger front air- you can insert the seat belt tongue of the bag is correct both before and during the seat belt into the belt buckle belonging to journey (Y page 39). the co-driver's seat. When doing so, route the seat belt between the ISOFIX or i-Size Protection provided by the airbags child restraint system and the backrest of the co-driver's seat. Depending on the accident situation, an air- >> Safety. bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt and can increase protection. Airbags G WARNING Overview of airbags If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the air- The installation location of an airbag is bags identified by the AIRBAG symbol. Robserve the following notes A deployed airbag can increase the level of protection provided to the vehicle occupant. Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle AIRBAG Possible protection occupant. for: : Headbag4 Head To avoid risks resulting from a deployed airbag: ; Driver's Thigh, knee and lower Radjust the seats properly before beginning kneebag leg your journey. Move the driver's and co- driver's seats as far back as possible = Driver's air- Head and thorax bag Always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (Y page 54). ? Front- Head and thorax Rhold the steering wheel by the rim only. passenger This allows the airbag to deploy fully front airbag Ralways lean against the backrest while A Windowbag5 Head driving. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. Otherwise, you are B Sidebag Thorax and pelvis in the airbags' deployment area

4 smart fortwo cabrio 5 smart fortwo coupé Occupant safety 39

Rfeet should always be placed on the WARNING ground. Do not place your feet on the dash- G board, for example. Otherwise, your feet Sensors to control the airbags are located are in the airbag's deployment area in the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rwhen travelling with children in the vehi- formed correctly to the doors or door pan- cle, observe the additional notes elling, as well as damaged doors, can lead (Y page 40) to the function of the sensors being Ralways stow objects correctly and securely impaired. The airbags might therefore not Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent function properly any more. Consequently, the airbag from functioning correctly. the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu-

Therefore, always make sure that: pants as they are designed to do. This >> Safety. Rthere are no people, animals or objects poses an increased risk of injury. between the vehicle occupants and the Never modify the doors or parts of the airbag doors. Always have work on the doors or Rthere are no objects between the seat, door door panelling carried out at a qualified and B-pillar specialist workshop. Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hang- ers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks G WARNING Rthere are no accessories, such as drinks An airbag that has been deployed once can holders, attached in the airbag's cannot provide any further protection and, deployment area, e.g. on doors, side win- in the event of an accident, can no longer dows or side trim panels perform its intended protective function. Rthere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile There is an increased risk of injury. objects in the pockets of your clothing. Stow such objects in a suitable place Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop to have the deployed air- Limited protection from airbags bag replaced.

WARNING Have deployed airbags replaced immedi- G ately. If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag Status of the front-passenger front air- can no longer function correctly. There is bag an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps objects to it. The front-passenger front airbag can be enabled or disabled using the airbag-off G WARNING switch in the instrument panel on the front- Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or passenger side (Y page 44). even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by smart.

Z 40 Children in the vehicle

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER Children in the vehicle AIR BAG ON indicator lamps are part of the front-passenger front airbag deactivation Travelling safely with children on system. board The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. G WARNING RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the If you leave children unattended in the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle It will then not be deployed in the event of in motion if, for example, they: an accident. Rrelease the parking brake >> Safety. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. Rshift the automatic transmission out of The front-passenger front airbag may park position P deploy during an accident. Rstart the engine If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front-passenger In addition, they may operate vehicle front airbag is correct depending on the sit- equipment and become trapped. There is a uation both before and during the journey. risk of an accident and injury. RChildren in a child restraint system: When leaving the vehicle, always take the whether the front-passenger front airbag key with you and lock the vehicle. Never must be enabled or disabled depends on leave children unattended in the vehicle. the installed child restraint system and the age and size of the child. Make sure that you observe the notes on "Children in G WARNING the vehicle" (Y page 40). There, you will If persons (particularly children) are also find information on rearward- or exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged forward-facing child restraint systems on period, there is a risk of serious or even the front-passenger seat. fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front- passenger front airbag is enabled. Make cle. sure that you read the notes on "Seat belts" (Y page 36) and "Airbags" (Y page 38). G WARNING There, you can also find information on the If the child restraint system is placed in correct seat position. direct sunlight, the parts could become Observe the information on the airbag deac- very hot. Children could be suffer burns by tivation system of the front-passenger front touching these parts, in particular on the airbag ( page 44). Y metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children in the vehicle 41

To provide better protection to children increased risk of injury, possibly even younger than twelve years old and under fatal. 1.50 m tall, smart recommends always observing the following: Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make RSecure children only in a child restraint system that is appropriate for the age, sure that you observe the child restraint weight and size of the child and that is system manufacturer's installation recommended and suitable for use in smart instructions. vehicles. Make sure you observe the instructions for correct use of the child WARNING restraint system. G Child restraint systems or their securing >> Safety. ROnly use the following securing systems with the child restraint systems: systems that have been damaged or sub- - the seat belt system jected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In - the ISOFIX or i‑Size securing rings the event of an accident, sharp braking or a - the Top Tether anchorages sudden change in direction, the child may RThe manufacturer's child restraint system installation instructions. not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. RThe warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected WARNING G to a load in an accident. Have the child If the child restraint system is incorrectly restraint securing systems checked in a fitted on the seat position suitable for this qualified specialist workshop before fit- purpose, it cannot perform its intended ting a child restraint system again. protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden i Use the care products approved by smart change in direction, the child may not be to clean the child restraint systems rec- held securely. There is an increased risk of ommended by smart. Further information serious or even fatal injuries. can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the Also, always observe the detailed information below: child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system RWhen fitting a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, observe the is resting on the seat surface. Never place notes on child restraint systems on the objects under or behind the child restraint front-passenger seat (Y page 45). system, e.g. cushions. Only use child RNotes on attaching suitable child restraint restraint systems with the original cover systems (Y page 47). designed for them. Only replace damaged RNotes on recommended child restraint covers with genuine covers. systems (Y page 49). RInstructions and safety notes on disabling G WARNING and enabling the front-passenger front If the child restraint system is fitted incor- airbag (Y page 44). rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in RNotes on seat belts (Y page 36). the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an

Z 42 Children in the vehicle

ISOFIX and i‑Size child seat securing restraint systems are approved in accord- systems ance with ECE R129. Only child restraint systems that comply Notes on ISOFIX and i-Size child seat with the ECE R44 standard may be attached to securing systems the ISOFIX securing rings. ISOFIX child restraint systems approved in accordance WARNING with ECE R44 and i-Size child restraint sys- G tems approved in accordance with ECE R129 For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys- can be attached to i-Size securing rings. tems, where the child is secured using the ISOFIX child restraint systems approved in integrated seat belt of the child restraint accordance with ECE R44 and i-Size child >> Safety. system, the permissible gross weight of restraint systems approved in accordance the child and the child restraint system is with ECE R129 can be attached to i-Size 33 kg. securing rings. If the child together with the child If you are using an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system on the front-passenger seat restraint system weighs more than 33 kg, and the child is not secured using the seat ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems belt of the front-passenger seat, the belt with integrated seat belt no longer offer warning may be activated (Y page 37). sufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size child To deactivate the belt warning for the front- seat securing systems may be overloaded passenger, proceed as follows: and will not be able to restrain the child, X Insert the seat belt tongue into the buckle for example, in the event of an accident. before the child restraint system is fitted This poses an increased risk of injury or to the front-passenger seat. even fatal injury. X Then fit the ISOFIX child restraint system If the child together with the child to the front-passenger seat (with seat belt restraint system weighs more than 33 kg , fastened). only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint Make sure that the seat belt does not systems with which the child is secured become damaged. with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

RAlways observe the specifications for the weight of the child restraint system: - in the installation and operating instructions of the manufacturer of the child restraint system which is used - on a label on the child restraint system, if available Check regularly that the maximum permissible gross weight of child and child Symbol for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system restraint system is still being maintained. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. ISOFIX and i‑Size are standardised securing systems for special restraint systems. ISOFIX child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R44, i‑Size child Children in the vehicle 43

Check regularly that the maximum permissible gross weight of child and child restraint system is still being maintained. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings. >> Safety.

Symbol for attaching an i-Size child restraint system

Attaching ISOFIX and i‑Size child seat securing systems

G WARNING For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems, where the child is secured using the integrated seat belt of the child restraint system, the permissible gross weight of the child and the child restraint system is 33 kg. If the child together with the child restraint system weighs more than 33 kg, ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems with integrated seat belt no longer offer sufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size child seat securing systems may be overloaded and will not be able to restrain the child, for example, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system even fatal injury. on both ISOFIX securing rings : or i-Size If the child together with the child securing rings ;. restraint system weighs more than 33 kg , or only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint X Install the i-Size or ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is secured system on both i-Size securing rings ;. with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Securing Top Tether

RAlways observe the specifications for the Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury, weight of the child restraint system: since it provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured - in the installation and operating with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. instructions of the manufacturer of the child restraint system which is used The child restraint system must be equipped with a Top Tether belt. - on a label on the child restraint system, if available

Z 44 Children in the vehicle

Disabling/enabling the front- passenger front airbag

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could >> Safety. then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward- facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the lug- this Owner's Manual as well as the child gage compartment floor. restraint system manufacturer's installa- X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys- tion instructions. tem with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. G WARNING X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the If you secure a child in a rearward-facing head restraint, keeping it as central as child restraint system on the front- possible, into the luggage compartment passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR through loop :. BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front- X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether passenger front airbag can deploy in the belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. event of an accident. The child could be Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. struck by the airbag. This poses an Ensure that: increased risk of injury or even fatal RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top injury. Tether anchorage ; as shown. Make sure that the front-passenger front RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. with the child restraint system manufac- NEVER use a rearward-facing child turer's installation instructions when doing so. restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward- facing child restraint system to the front- Children in the vehicle 45 passenger seat. For more information, see must disable the front-passenger front air- "Problems with automatic front-passenger bag. airbag deactivation" (Y page 181). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front- passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could:

Rcome into contact with the vehicle's >> Safety. interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER Airbag-off switch : for manually enabling AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on. and disabling the front-passenger front air- This poses an increased risk of injury or bag is in the dashboard on the front- passenger side. even fatal injury. Push in front-passenger airbag-off Move the front-passenger seat as far back X switch : beyond the point of resistance. as possible. Always make sure that the To disable the front-passenger front air- shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from X bag: turn airbag-off switch : anti-clock- the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt wise. guide on the child restraint system. The The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indica- shoulder belt strap must be routed for- tor lamp on the overhead control panel wards and downwards from the vehicle lights up and stays on when the ignition is belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front- switched on (Y page 39). passenger seat accordingly. Additionally, X To enable the front-passenger front air- always observe the information on suita- bag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indicator ble positioning of the child restraint sys- lamp on the overhead control panel lights tem in this Owner's Manual in addition to up and stays on when the ignition is the child restraint system manufacturer's switched on (Y page 39). installation instructions. The front-passenger airbag is enabled when the ignition is switched on unless the front- passenger front airbag has been manually disabled. If the front-passenger front airbag is disabled and the ignition is switched on, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp in the overhead control panel (Y page 39) lights up permanently.

Child restraint systems on the front- passenger seat Notes on child restraint systems Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a child restraint sys- If you use a rearward-facing child restraint tem on the front-passenger seat, always system on the front-passenger seat, you observe the information on "Disabling the front-passenger front airbag" (Y page 44).

Z 46 Children in the vehicle

You avoid risks when you: Notes on rearward and forward facing Renable or disable the front-passenger child restraint systems front airbag correctly. Rposition the child restraint system favour- ably. >> Safety.

Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a rearward-facing A warning notice is located on the front- child restraint system on the co-driver's passenger sun visor. seat, you must always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. G WARNING This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR If you secure a child in a child restraint BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously system on the front-passenger seat and (Y page 39). the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp When using a child restraint system on the is off, the front-passenger front airbag can co-driver's seat you must observe the fol- deploy in the event of an accident. The lowing: child could be struck by the airbag. This Rmove the co-driver's seat as far back as poses an increased risk of injury or even possible. fatal injury. Rthe surface of the child restraint system must lie fully on the co-driver's seat cush- Make sure that the front-passenger front ion. airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER Rthe backrest of a forward-facing child AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. restraint system must, as far as possible, NEVER use a rearward-facing child rest on the backrest of the co-driver's seat. restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE The child restraint system must not touch AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. INJURY to the child can occur. Radjust the angle of the backrest appropri- Always observe the notes on transporting ately. R children safely (Y page 40). if necessary, remove the head restraint on the front-passenger seat. Ralways make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the belt sash guide. Rnever place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Children in the vehicle 47

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

Suitability of the seats for child restraint systems Notes on attaching suitable child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the >> Safety. following ECE standards are permitted for Label for an ECE R129 compliant child restraint use in the vehicle: system RECE R44 ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems in RECE R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) the following "Universal" category may be Only suitable for use in the vehicles speci- used on seats marked U, UF, IUF or i-U in fied which are equipped with three-point accordance with the tables on the suitability seat belts approved in accordance with ECE of the seats for attaching child restraint sys- Regulation No.16 or similar standards. tems. Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "Semi-universal" on the approval label. Use is only permitted if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Label for an ECE R44 compliant child restraint system

Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems Observe the following notes: Rfor certain child restraint systems of weight category II or III there may be limitations for the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. Rthe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Robserve the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. Legend for the table: RX: not suitable for children of this weight category. RU: suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category.

Z 48 Children in the vehicle

RUF: suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. RL: suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in the "Over- view of recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 49) or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight categories Front-passenger front air- Front-passenger front airbag is enabled bag deactivated6 Group 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L >> Safety. Group I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L

Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems Observe the following notes: Rfor certain child restraint systems of weight category II or III there may be limitations for the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. Rthe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Robserve the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. Legend for the table: RX: not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category. RIUF: suitable for a forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint system in the "Universal" category in this weight category. RIL: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in the table in the "Overview of recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 49) or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight category Size cate- Equipment Front- Front- gories passenger passenger front airbag is front airbag enabled deactiva- ted7 Carry cot F ISO/L1 X X G ISO/L2 X X 0 up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL up to approximately 6 months 0+ up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL up to approximately D ISO/R2 X IL 15 months

6 The vehicle is fitted with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 7 The vehicle is fitted with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Children in the vehicle 49

Weight category Size cate- Equipment Front- Front- gories passenger passenger front airbag is front airbag enabled deactiva- ted7 C ISO/R3 X IL I 9 kg to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X IL between approximately C ISO/R3 X IL 9 months and 4 years B ISO/F2 IUF IUF >> Safety. B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF A ISO/F3 IUF IUF

Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems Observe the following notes: Rfor certain child restraint systems of weight category II or III there may be limitations for the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. Rthe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Robserve the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. Legend for the table: RX: not suitable for an i‑Size child restraint system in this weight category. Ri‑U: suitable for a forward or rearward-facing i‑Size child restraint system of the "Uni- versal" category. Ri‑UF: suitable for a forward-facing i-Size child restraint system of the "Universal" category". Front-passenger front airbag is Front-passenger front enabled airbag IS deactivated8 i‑Size child restraint system i‑UF i‑U

Overview of recommended child restraint systems The smart fortwo is equipped with a manual front-passenger front airbag deactivation system.

X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, disable the front-passenger airbag (Y page 44).

7 The vehicle is fitted with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 8 The vehicle is fitted with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

Z 50 Children in the vehicle

Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number Order number (E1 ...) (A 000 ...)9 Category 0: Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 970 36 00 up to 10 kg plus II 970 57 00 up to approximately 6 months Category 0+: Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 970 36 00

>> Safety. up to 13 kg plus II 970 57 00 up to approximately 15 months Category I: Britax Römer DUO PLUS 04 301133 970 37 00 9 kg up to 18 kg 970 58 00 between approximately 9 months and 4 years Category II/III: Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 38 00 15 kg up to 36 kg 970 59 00 from approximately Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301304 970 61 00 4 years to 12 years

Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems for the "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category

Weight cate- Size cat- Manufacturer Type Approval Order number9 gories egory number (E1 ...) Category 0+: E Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224 up to 13 kg plus Category I: B1 Britax Römer DUO PLUS 04 301133 A 000 970 37 00 9 kg up to A 000 970 58 00 18 kg

i You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from a smart centre. Further related subjects:

RNotes on child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat (Y page 45). RNotes on attaching suitable child restraint systems (Y page 47).

9 Colour code 9H95 Driving safely 51

Pets in the vehicle smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or Braking with ABS (Anti-lock Braking unsecured in the vehicle, they may press System) buttons or switches, for instance. ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way In this way, animals may: that the wheels do not lock when you brake. Ractivate vehicle equipment and become This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.

trapped, for example >> Safety. When you switch on the ignition, the ! Rswitch systems on or off and thereby warning lamp in the instrument cluster endanger other road users lights up. It goes out after the engine is star- Furthermore, unsecured animals may be ted. flung around inside the vehicle in the ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h, event of an accident or abrupt steering or regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS braking manoeuvre, and thereby injure intervenes in the case of slippery road surfaces, even when you only brake gently. vehicle occupants. There is a risk of accident and injury. X To brake while ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until Never leave animals unattended in the the braking situation is over. vehicle. X To make a full brake application: depress Always secure animals properly when the brake pedal with full force. driving, for instance with a suitable pet carrier. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking Driving safely characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety sys- Driving safety system limitations tems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. ! Make sure you have suitable tyres, so that assistance systems and driving Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked safety systems can work as effectively as immediately at a qualified specialist possible. workshop. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor Using Active Brake Assist override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist Useful information driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and With the help of the radar sensor system, for braking in good time. Always adapt your Active Brake Assist can calculate the dis- driving style to suit the prevailing road, tance of your vehicle to the vehicle travelling weather and traffic conditions and maintain in front. a safe distance from the vehicle in front. If for several seconds, the distance to the Drive carefully. vehicle ahead is insufficient for the speed For safety reasons, smart recommends that you are driving at, Active Brake Assist alerts you only use snow chains that have been the driver visually. specially approved for your vehicle by smart. If a risk of collision is detected, Active Brake Further information can be obtained at a Assist alerts the driver both visually and acoustically. In addition, Active Brake Assist

Z 52 Driving safely

prepares the vehicle for a possible emer- Deactivate Active Brake Assist. Have Active gency braking manoeuvre. Brake Assist checked at a qualified spe- In particularly critical situations Active cialist workshop. Brake Assist may brake autonomously. In this case, Active Brake Assist continues to The following requirements must also be ful- alert the driver both visually and acousti- filled: cally. Rthe selector lever is in position 7. Please note Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe driving speed is within the suitable speed range. >> Safety. G WARNING Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly Detection can be restricted under the follow- identify objects and complex traffic situa- ing conditions: tions. Rthe vehicle is new or service work has been In these cases, Active Brake Assist may: carried out on the system. In this case, observe the information on running-in the Rwarn or brake for no reason vehicle Rnot issue a warning Rthe radio sensors are dirty or covered ( page 160) Rnot brake Y Rin heavy rain or snow There is a risk of an accident. Rthere is interference from other radar Always pay careful attention to the traffic sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks situation and do not rely on Active Brake Rthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow, Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or e.g. a motorcycle manoeuvre if necessary. Rthe vehicle travelling in front is travelling on a different line G WARNING Autonomous braking can be cancelled by Active Brake Assist does not react: briefly depressing the accelerator pedal. If the brake lamps are inoperative, deacti- Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or ani- vate Active Brake Assist. mals i Observe the notes on "Limitations of the Rto approaching vehicles driving safety systems" (Y page 51). Rto cross traffic Ron bends Distance warning and forward collision As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot warning with autonomous braking func- intervene in all critical situations. There is tion a risk of an accident. Method of operation Always pay careful attention to the traffic If the distance maintained to the vehicle situation and be prepared to brake. ahead is insufficient for the speed you are driving at, the · warning lamp lights up. G WARNING If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- Severe jolting, for example in the case of a sion while driving, the · warning lamp collision, may cause the radar sensors to lights up and a warning tone sounds. If the be misaligned. The function of Active Brake driver depresses the brake pedal fast, the Assist is then impaired. braking pressure may be increased to a full brake application. There is a risk of an accident. The autonomous braking function may intervene if the driver does not react to the forward collision warning. Driving safely 53

When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, ESP® supports the driver when pulling away the forward collision warning may issue a on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also sta- warning in the following situations: bilise the vehicle during braking. ESP® comprises ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Situation Speed you are trav- Crosswind Assist. elling ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if Vehicles travelling 30 - 140 km/h they spin. This enables you to pull away and ahead accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. Vehicles coming to a 30 - 140 km/h Strong crosswind gusts can impair the road- standstill

holding of your vehicle when driving >> Safety. Stationary vehicles 30 - 80 km/h straight ahead. Crosswind Assist reduces these impairments. Other objects or No warning possible Crosswind assist is active at vehicle speeds crossing vehicles above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, If ESP® intervenes, pull away carefully and the autonomous braking function may inter- adapt your driving style to the prevailing vene in the following situations: road and weather conditions. If the ÷ warning lamp goes out before Situation Speed you are trav- ® ® elling beginning the journey, ESP is active. If ESP intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes in Vehicles travelling 30 - 140 km/h the instrument cluster. ahead G WARNING Vehicles coming to a 30 - 140 km/h If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to standstill stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other Stationary vehicles No intervention driving safety systems are switched off. possible This increases the risk of skidding and an Other objects or No intervention accident. crossing vehicles possible Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is automatically activa- Information on EBD (Electronic Brake- ted when you start the engine. force Distribution) Monochrome display: activating/deactivat- EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- ing Active Brake Assist using the on-board sure on the rear wheels to improve driving computer (Y page 102). stability while braking. Colour display: activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist using the on-board com- G WARNING puter (Y page 103). If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- Driving with ESP® dent. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating You should therefore adapt your driving from the direction desired by the driver, one style to the different handling character- or more wheels are braked to stabilise the istics. Have the brake system checked at a vehicle. qualified specialist workshop.

Z 54 Correct driver's seat position

Understanding functions of the key X To lock centrally: press the & button. The turn signals flash twice. X To activate the double-lock function (only for England): press the & button twice. The turn signals flash twice long and three times short

Opening the door

X Press the # button on the key. X Open the door. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within : % Unlocks the vehicle approximately two minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti- ; º smart fortwo coupé: Opens the upper tailgate (press and hold) theft alarm system again. ; º smart fortwo cabrio: Opens the soft top (press and hold) = & Locks the vehicle Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING

>> Entering and setting up. You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before : % Unlocks the vehicle starting the engine. ; & Locks the vehicle = é smart fortwo coupé: Opens the upper tailgate (press and hold) = é smart fortwo cabrio: Opens the soft top (press and hold)

X To unlock centrally: press the % button. The turn signals flash once. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately 2 minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti-theft alarm system again.

X To unlock and open the upper tailgate (smart fortwo coupé): press and hold the Observe the following rules on the correct º or é button. driver's seat position: X To open the soft top to the B-pillar (smart Rthe driver must be as far away from the fortwo cabrio): press and hold the º or driver's airbag as possible (Y page 38). é button. Rthe driver must be wearing seat belt = properly. Adjusting the seats 55

Rthe driver must be able to depress the ped- Make sure that no one has any part of their als properly. body within the sweep of the seat when Rthe driver must be able to move their legs adjusting it. freely. Rthe driver must be able to reach steering WARNING wheel : with their arms slightly bent. G Rthe driver must be able to see all the dis- The seat belt does not offer the intended plays in the instrument cluster clearly. level of protection if you have not moved Rmove seat backrest ; to an almost vertical the backrest to an almost vertical position. position. When braking or in the event of an acci- Rsit in a normal upright position. dent, you could slide underneath the seat Rthe seat belt must fit snugly across your belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, body. for example. This poses an increased risk of Rthe seat belt must be routed across the injury or even fatal injury. middle of your shoulder. Adjust the seat properly before beginning Rthe seat belt must be routed in your pelvic your journey. Always ensure that the area across the hip joints. backrest is in an almost vertical position Radjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors and that the shoulder section of your seat- so that the driver has a good view of the belt is routed across the centre of your road and traffic. shoulder.

Adjusting the seats G WARNING >> Entering and setting up. The steering wheel may move unexpect- Please note edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- WARNING G cle. There is a risk of an accident. If children adjust the seats, they could Make sure that the steering wheel is locked become trapped, especially if they are before driving off. Never unlock the steer- unattended. There is a risk of injury. ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING leave children unattended in the vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel engaged, it could unexpectedly move while or mirror driving. This could cause you to lose con- Rfasten the seat belt. trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an There is a risk of an accident. accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or Always ensure that the driver's seat is mirror and fasten the seat belt before engaged before starting the vehicle. starting the engine.

G WARNING ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when When adjusting a seat, you or another moving the seats back. There is a risk that vehicle occupant could become trapped by the seats and/or the objects could be dam- the guide rail of the seat, for instance. aged. There is a risk of injury.

Z 56 Adjusting the steering wheel

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a (Y page 38) and "Children in the vehicle" lever) (Y page 40). X Pull lever : forwards. X At the same time, move the backrest for- Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi- wards or backwards. tion

Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a handwheel)

X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- Seat with a lever edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi-

>> Entering and setting up. cle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel Seat with a handwheel or mirror To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position, the Rfasten the seat belt. seat belt must not be fastened. There is a risk of an accident. X Lift lever =. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or X Slide the seat forwards or backwards. The seat engages audibly. mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine.

Adjusting the seat hight (seat with a G WARNING lever only) Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a X Pull handle ; up or push it down several risk of injury. times. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Adjusting the mirrors 57

Understanding automatic anti-dazzle mode of interior mirror Please note

G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or X Fold down lever :. clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. X Set desired steering wheel height 2. X Fold up lever :. If you come into contact with the electro- X Check that the steering column is locked. lyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. Adjusting the mirrors RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of Adjusting the interior mirror your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-

ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. >> Entering and setting up. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. X Move the interior mirror up, down, left or right. Useful information The interior mirror automatically goes into Manually setting the interior mirror to anti-dazzle mode if simultaneously: anti-dazzle mode Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps hits the X Fold lever : forwards. sensor in the interior mirror The interior mirror does not go into anti- dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.

Z 58 Adjusting the mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors man- Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- ually cally

G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec- trically, the ignition must be switched on. G WARNING X To select the left or right exterior mirror: The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the turn control = left 1 or right 2. image. Objects visible in the mirrors are X To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con- closer than they appear. You could mis- trol = up, down, left or right. judge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for >> Entering and setting up. instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you.

X Move lever : up, down, left or right. Pulling away 59

Starting the engine Please note

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for u To insert the key into the ignition lock example, trap themselves. 1 To switch on the power supply Children could also set the vehicle in 2 To switch on the ignition motion, for example by: 3 To start the engine

Rreleasing the parking brake >> Driving. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Automatic transmission Rstarting the engine. X Turn the key to position 3. The READY indicator appears in the instru- There is a risk of an accident and injury. ment cluster. A tone sounds. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Shift out of transmission position j or i. key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of chil- Pulling away dren. Please note WARNING G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the G key, the key could be unintentionally Objects in the driver's footwell can impede turned in the ignition lock. This could pedal travel or block a pedal which is cause the engine to be switched off. There depressed. This jeopardises safe operation is a risk of an accident. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before that they cannot reach the driver's foot- inserting the key into the ignition lock. well. Make sure the floormats and carpets are properly secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or carpets on top of one another.

G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers

Z 60 Pulling away

There is a risk of an accident. lock. This increases the risk of skidding Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct and an accident. usage of the pedals. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do G WARNING not apply the parking brake too firmly. If If you switch off the ignition while driving, the wheels lock, release the parking brake safety-relevant functions are only avail- until the wheels begin turning again. able with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steer- G WARNING ing and the brake boosting effect. You will If you leave children unattended in the require considerably more effort to steer vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle and brake. There is a risk of an accident. in motion if, for example, they: Do not switch off the ignition while driv- Rrelease the parking brake ing. Rshift the automatic transmission out of >> Driving. Note the following when pulling away: park position P Rstart the engine RDo not drive with the parking brake applied. In addition, they may operate vehicle RUse caution when pulling away on slippery equipment and become trapped. There is a surfaces. risk of an accident and injury. RDo not allow tyres to spin. When leaving the vehicle, always take the RDepress the brake pedal and keep it key with you and lock the vehicle. Never depressed. leave children unattended in the vehicle. RPress the release button on the selector lever. Applying the parking brake RShift the gear selector lever to position h or k.

Using the parking brake Please note

G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can:

R overheat and cause a fire X Pull parking brake ; upwards. Rlose its hold function. The brake lights do not light up when you There is a risk of fire and an accident. brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Releasing the parking brake

X depress the brake pedal and keep it G WARNING depressed. If you must brake the vehicle with the X Press release button : on parking parking brake, the braking distance is brake ; and move the parking brake down considerably longer and the wheels could to the stop. Automatic transmission 61

Hill start assist The following transmission positions are available: G WARNING RB Park position After a while, hill start assist no longer Position j should not be used to brake the holds the vehicle and it may roll away. vehicle when parking. To secure the vehi- There is a risk of an accident and injury. cle, apply the parking brake in addition to shifting to transmission position . Therefore, quickly move your foot from the j brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never RC Reverse gear leave the vehicle when it is held by hill RA Neutral start assist. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in place R7 Drive when driving uphill as soon as the brake pedal is released. Hill start assist is only active in the follow- Changing the transmission position ing situations: >> Driving. Rwhen pulling away on an uphill slope Rwhen the parking brake is released Rthe transmission is not in position i RESP® is functioning correctly. X Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about one second. X Pull away.

Automatic transmission B Park position with parking lock C Reverse gear Please note A Neutral 7 Drive G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the auto- The ignition must be switched on in order to shift the transmission to positions , or matic transmission shifts into neutral j i k. To shift the transmission from position position N. The vehicle may roll away. j, you must also depress the brake pedal. There is a risk of an accident. X Press release knob :. Always shift to parking position P before X Shift the selector lever to the desired switching off the engine. Secure the parked transmission position. vehicle against rolling away by applying the parking brake. Maximum acceleration (kickdown) To reach maximum acceleration, use kick- Transmission position display down:

! Only shift into transmission positions X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the B, C or A when the vehicle is pressure point. stationary. Otherwise, you may damage X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the the transmission. desired speed is reached.

Z 62 Radar-based recuperation

Using the turn signals Deactivating/activating the acoustic presence indicator

The ignition must be switched on in order to use the turn signals. The acoustic presence indicator is automatically activated each time the ignition is >> Driving. X To indicate: press the combination switch started. in the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2 (left) past the point of resistance. X Press the switch. If the acoustic presence indicator is deac- X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance. tivated, the LED on the switch lights The turn signal flashes three times. up.

Acoustic presence indicator Radar-based recuperation

Useful information Only for instrument cluster with colour dis- Vehicles with an electric motor generate play: much less driving noise than vehicles with The "Radar-based recuperation" function internal combustion engines. As a result, the adapts the vehicle's rate of recuperation to vehicle may not be heard by other road users current traffic conditions. It activates itself in certain situations. automatically as soon as the accelerator In order to allow your vehicle to be heard pedal is released. There are five levels up to when it is moving at slow speeds, a sound the maximum value for optimum recupera- generator installed in the vehicle produces a tion and distance to the vehicle ahead. The specific noise at speeds between 0 and maximum value can vary depending on the 30 km/h. This function is called the acoustic charge status of the battery and the battery presence indicator. This helps other road temperature. users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, Radar sensors measure the distance to and to hear your vehicle better. The acoustic the speed of a vehicle ahead. The shorter the presence indicator can also be heard in the distance to the vehicle ahead, the greater the vehicle interior. recuperation. When recuperation is high, the The volume of the acoustic presence indica- brake lamps also light up. The current level tor depends on the engine speed. The faster of recuperation is not shown in the power you accelerate, the louder the sound is. At display (Y page 64). speeds of over 30 km/h, the sound is switched Radar-based recuperation is not active in off. Above this speed, the driving noise nat- the following cases: urally created by the vehicle is typically Rthe radar sensor system is malfunctioning sufficient for the vehicle to be heard in good Rthe connection to the radar is interrupted time by other road users. RActive Brake Assist is deactivated RECO mode is switched on Driving economically 63

Rthe vehicle speed is too low Rdrive with care Rthe transmission is in position k or i Ruse the air conditioning and the electrical Radar-based recuperation is switched off consumers sparingly when ECO mode is activated. Rhave maintenance work carried out at the On-board computer with colour display: the specified service intervals symbol in the display indicates the You can use ECO mode in order to save more status of radar-based recuperation: energy. ECO mode has the following characteristics: R lights up white: switched on, not active Rreduced torque and significantly reduced power. This supports a particularly effi- R lights up green: switched on, active cient, steady driving style. The speed is reduced to approx. 110 km/h. R is not displayed: Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the radar sensor is mal- Rthe performance of the air-conditioning functioning and heating systems is reduced On-board computer with colour display: Rthe maximum available recuperation is radar-based recuperation is switched on and activated >> Driving. off in the on-board computer (Y page 103). Rreduced acceleration Observe the notes on safe driving Rthe "radar-based recuperation" function (Y page 51). is switched off To increase acceleration when in ECO mode, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Driving economically pressure point. Notes on economical driving In order to save energy, with smart electric drive a part of the kinetic energy is recuperated and stored in the high-voltage battery. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle decelerates. In the following cases, the vehicle does not decelerate, or only decelerates to a limited extent, when the accelerator pedal is released: Rthe gear lever is in position h and the vehicle is rolling backwards Switching ECO mode on and off Rthe gear lever is in position k and the X Press button :. vehicle is rolling forwards If the energy-saving function is activated, On steep slopes, the vehicle may not be held the ECO display is shown in the on-board at all or only be held to a limited degree. computer. In the following cases recuperation is The energy-saving function is switched restricted: off when the ignition is restarted. Rthe high-voltage battery is fully charged or too cold Rthe power electronics or motor has overheated Recommendations for driving economically: Raccelerate moderately Robserve the power availability display (Y page 64)

Z 64 Driving economically

Power and charge level display Rthere is insufficient power available from the high-voltage battery Useful information Rthere is a malfunction in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system If the drive system has been started, the needle of power display : is in position "0". The READY indicator appears in the instrument cluster. A tone sounds. The vehicle is ready for driving.

Charge level display ! Do not hang any objects on the charge level gauge. This could cause the charge level gauge to be torn out of its anchorage point and be : Power display damaged. >> Driving. ; Charge level display Charge level display ; displays the charge Power display : and charge level display ; status of the high-voltage battery as a per- can be adjusted to the left or right. The centage. charge level display lights up when the vehicle is unlocked. The high-voltage battery has reached the reserve level in the following cases: Power display Rthe Battery Reserve Level message appears in the display ! Do not hang any objects on the power Rcharge level display ; is in the red area display. This could cause the dashboard clock to be i Charge the high-voltage battery when torn out of its anchorage point and be the charge falls below 20%. severely damaged. Power display : contains two areas: Understanding the eco score display in RArea to the right of 0 The current power that the high-voltage the on-board computer battery provides is shown here. 100% cor- Useful information responds to the peak performance of the high-voltage battery. The eco score display provides information RArea to the left of 0 on how to drive economically. The vehicle's level of recuperation in over- A higher percentage indicates a more eco- run mode and when braking is shown here. nomical driving style. The LED ring in power display : shows the The percentage of the eco score display is power output available. only calculated after a short distance. If the If the needle for power display : is in the ignition remains switched off for longer than "OFF" position, the vehicle is not ready to four hours, the eco score display will be reset. drive because: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe gear lever has not been moved to position i or j to start the drive system Rthe charging cable is still connected to the vehicle socket Driving economically 65

Monochrome display RBar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐ tory and shift RBar graphs for Speed and Anticipation RDistance covered RTotal eco score as a percentage

Saving the current trip

X Select Current trip > Save. X Select the category under which you want to save the trip. The values for the current trip will be added to the category selected and the The percentage of the eco score display current trip will be reset. In the instrument increases when you: cluster, the trip computer values will be returned to “From reset”. Raccelerate with moderation The values for the current trip will be >> Driving. Ravoid unnecessary acceleration and added to the category selected and the deceleration current trip will be reset. In the instrument cluster, the values for the "From start" trip Colour display computer and eco score display will be reset.

Comparing the current trip with the saved trips from a category

The percentage in the eco score display is calculated using the following categories: RSpeed: the value increases when driving at low speeds. RAnticipation: the value increases when unnecessary acceleration and deceleration is avoided.

: Last trip saved in this category Using the eco score display in the smart ; Average value for the category Media-System = Best trip in the category Select Current trip > W > Compare. Calling up the eco score menu X X Select category. X Select Vehicle > eco score. A comparison of the values for the current trip with the values of the selected category appears. Evaluating the current trip X Select the comparison value :, ; or =. X Select Current trip . The current trip is compared to the respec- The following rating information and val- tive comparison value from the category. ues appear:

Z 66 Braking correctly

Resetting the current trip data Braking correctly X Select Current trip > Reset. Please note X Select Yes. In the instrument cluster, the trip com- G WARNING puter values will be returned to “From The braking system can overheat if you reset”. leave your foot on the brake pedal while In the instrument cluster, the values for driving. This increases the braking dis- the "From start" trip computer and eco score display will be reset. tance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Activating/deactivating eco score after a trip Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake X To activate: select Current trip > W > pedal and the accelerator pedal while Show eco score after trip. driving. To deactivate: select Current trip > W >

>> Driving. X Hide eco score after trip. The vehicle decelerates as soon as you release the accelerator pedal. This aids recu- Displaying eco score for saved trips in a peration as the motor is used as a generator and charges the high-voltage battery. category

X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips. Braking on steep downhill gradients X Select category. Observe the following rules when driving on eco score contains the following compari- downhill gradients: son values for each category: R RSummary do not move the selector lever to position i RLast value Rif recuperation is restricted, also brake at RAverage value intervals RBest value The following types of evaluations are available for the Last trip saved cate- Braking on wet road surfaces gory: RSummary There may be a delayed brake response when driving on wet roads, after driving through a RDetailed report car wash or after driving through deep water. X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle Renaming a category in front. At least one trip must be stored in the respec- X Brake more firmly. tive category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Rename this category. Braking on salt-treated roads When driving on salt-treated roads, a layer Resetting the eco score of one category of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This increases the vehicle's braking dis- At least one trip must be stored in the respec- tance. tive category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Reset this category. Lane Keeping Assist 67

X In order to prevent any salt build-up, X If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer- apply the brakes occasionally while paying actions to counteract the movement. ing attention to the traffic conditions. X If the vehicle skids, shift the transmission X Brake carefully at the end of the journey to position i. and when starting the next journey. X Do not use the outside temperature display X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle as a way to determine if conditions are icy. in front. X Observe the road surface.

Driving on wet roads Lane Keeping Assist Aquaplaning Please note Depending on driving style and tyre tread depths, aquaplaning can occur on the road. G WARNING Adapt your driving style as follows: Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. X Reduce the speed. >> Driving. X Brake carefully. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: X Avoid sudden steering movements. Rissue an unnecessary warning Avoid tyre ruts. X Rnot issue a warning There is a risk of an accident. Fording Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts front or in the opposite direction create you. waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. WARNING These notes must be observed under all G circumstances. You could otherwise dam- The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not age the engine, the electronics or the return the vehicle to the original lane. transmission. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the following when driving through Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler- standing water: ate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane X Do not drive through water that is higher Keeping Assist alerts you. than the lower edge of the vehicle body. Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic and X Drive at walking pace. visual warning when a vehicle unintentionally leaves the lane. Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which is Winter driving located on the windscreen behind the rear- view mirror. X Before the start of winter, have the vehicle Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- checked at a qualified specialist work- cle in its lane. The driver is responsible for shop. driving the vehicle in a safe manner and X Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snow staying within the lane. chains. Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or fail X Drive carefully and avoid sudden acceler- to respond under the following conditions: ation, turning and braking on slippery road surfaces. Rpoor visibility Rstrong glaring light X Do not use cruise control. Rdirty windscreen in the camera area

Z 68 Cruise control and limiter

Runclear or broken lane markings X Press the switch. Rvery narrow and winding roads When Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated, Rhighly variable shade conditions on the the LED on the switch lights up. road On-board computer with colour display: When the turn signal is set, warnings are the display also shows a message. suppressed for a certain period of time. When the ignition is restarted, the last set- No warning is given in the following situa- ting of Lane Keeping Assist is retained. tions: Rwhen crossing a lane marking quickly Rat speeds below 70 km/h Cruise control and limiter On-board computer with monochrome display: the ¸ and ¤ symbols in the dis- Please note play indicate the status of Lane Keeping Assist: G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and this R¸: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are differs from your current speed, the vehi-

>> Driving. not detected due to external causes. No warning is given when the vehicle leaves cle will accelerate. If you do not know the the lane. stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate R¤: speed is above 70 km/h and the sys- unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- tem is able to detect lane markings. A dent. warning is given if the vehicle uninten- Before you call up the stored speed, pay tionally leaves the detected lane. attention to traffic conditions. If you do not On-board computer with colour display: The ¸ symbol in the display indicates the know the stored speed, store the desired status of Lane Keeping Assist: speed again. R¸ lights up white: speed is below Cruise control is used in order to drive at a 70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to constant speed for a prolonged period. The external causes. No warning is given when limiter helps to avoid exceeding a stored the vehicle leaves the lane. speed. R¸ lights up green: speed is above The driver is responsible for driving the 70 km/h and the system is able to detect vehicle in a safe manner, controlling the lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle speed and braking in good time. vehicle unintentionally leaves the detected lane. If there is a change of drivers, inform the new driver of the speed stored. The two driver assist systems require the following: Activating and deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Rfavourable weather and good visibility Rgood road and traffic conditions The cruise control and limiter systems do not brake automatically. Rreduce the vehicle speed by applying the brakes Speed regulation is cancelled when the following occur: Rbraking (including the parking brake) RESP® intervention On downhill gradients or when accelerating briefly, cruise control may interrupt speed Charging the high-voltage battery 69 regulation. Afterwards, the set speed is Interrupting cruise control and the applied again. limiter On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceed the set speed. In this case, the stored speed X Press ± button ?. flashes in the display and a warning tone The stored speed can be accessed again sounds. later. Cruise control is ready for use at speeds The stored speed is deleted when the engine above 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of is switched off. 30 km/h and over can be set as the maximum speed. Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa- Calling up the stored speed ted at the same time. X Press ° button =. X Cruise control: release the accelerator Activating cruise control or the limiter pedal. >> Driving. Deactivating cruise control or the limiter

X Press button : to OFF centre position. The ¯ or È symbol in the instrument cluster display goes out. The stored speed is deleted. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off.

X Press top (cruise control) or bottom (limiter) of button :. Charging the high-voltage battery The ¯ (cruise control) or È (limiter) button appears in the instrument cluster Please note display. G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify Storing the current speed components in the vehicle's high-voltage X Press ® button ;. electrical system or touch damaged com- Limiter: the stored speed appears next to ponents, you may be electrocuted. The the È symbol in the instrument cluster components in the vehicle's high-voltage display. electrical system may be damaged in an Cruise control: the stored speed appears accident, although the damage is not visi- next to the ¯ symbol in the instrument cluster display. ble. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not touch any high-voltage components after an accident and never modify the Adjusting the stored speed vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an acci- X Press (+) or (-) button ; until the desired dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec- speed is reached. trical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 70 Charging the high-voltage battery

G WARNING G DANGER In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal Connecting the charging cable to the wall- pressure of the high-voltage battery could box via an incorrectly installed wallbox or exceed a critical value. In this case, flam- by means of adapters, extension cables or mable gas escapes through a vent valve in similar could cause a fire or an electric the vehicle's underbody. The gas can shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. ignite. There is a risk of injury. To avoid such risks, observe the following: Leave the danger area immediately. Secure ROnly connect the charging cable to a the danger area at a suitable distance, wallbox: whilst observing legal requirements. - which has been properly installed and - has been inspected by a qualified G DANGER electrician Connecting the charging cable to the mains supply via incorrectly installed RFor safety reasons, only use charging cables which have been tested and

>> Driving. mains sockets or by means of adapters, extension cables or similar could cause a approved for charging the high-voltage fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of battery of an electric vehicle. fatal injury. RNever use damaged charging cables. To avoid hazardous situations, observe the RDo not connect the charging cable to an following: amplifier. ROnly connect the charging cable to RDo not extend the charging cable. mains sockets: RNever use an adapter. - which have been properly installed RObserve the safety notes in the operat- and ing instructions for the wallbox. - which have been inspected by a qualified electrician G DANGER RFor safety reasons, only use the charg- Charging the high-voltage battery with a ing cables supplied with the vehicle, or charging cable that does not function cor- charging cables which have been rectly could cause a fire or an electric approved for use with this vehicle. shock. There is a risk of fatal injury! RNever use a damaged charging cable. To avoid such risks, observe the following: RDo not use: REnsure that there are no fluids or foreign - extension cables objects in the charging cable connector or on the charging cable socket before - extension reels connecting the charging cable connec- - multiple sockets tor and the charging cable coupling. RNever use socket adapters to connect the RDo not place the charging cable in water, charging cable to the mains socket. The fluids or snow. only exception being if the adapter has RCheck the charging cable for faults, e.g. been tested and approved by the manu- for damage to the charging cable con- facturer for charging the high-voltage nector and the charging cable socket as battery of an electric vehicle. well as for cuts or tears in the cable RObserve the safety notes in the operat- insulation. ing instructions for the socket adapter. Charging the high-voltage battery 71

In cases of damage, contact a qualified charging immediately and contact a specialist workshop. qualified specialist workshop. RCheck the charging cable connector and RAfter charging the high-voltage battery, the charging cable coupling for rust or store the charging cable in the charging corrosion. cable bag and keep the charging cable In cases of damage due to rust or corro- out of reach of children and animals. sion, do not charge the high-voltage RCheck the maximum rating of the fuses of battery and contact a qualified special- the vehicle which is charged when sta- ist workshop. tionary. RCheck whether the external mains sup- G DANGER ply has a sufficient fuse in the building. The high-voltage battery charging process involves high voltage. If you use the G DANGER charging cable, the charging cable socket If prior to usage the charging cable is not or the charging cable connector incor- prepared correctly, it could cause a fire or >> Driving. rectly during the charging process, it an electric shock. This poses an increased could cause a fire or you could receive an risk of injury or even fatal injury. electric shock. There is a risk of fatal To avoid such risks, observe the following: injury! RBefore using the charging cable for the To avoid such risks, observe the following: first time, remove the adhesive tape RDo not pull out the charging cable con- which holds the cable together. nector or the charging cable socket dur- RUnwind the charging cable fully before ing the charging process. every charging process. RDo not charge the high-voltage battery REnsure that the charging cable is not in temperatures of over 50 † and below twisted. Otherwise, the charging cable -40 †. may overheat and the cable covering RDo not drive over charging cable con- may be damaged. nector. RDo not insert any objects which conduct RAvoid sharp impacts which could dam- electricity into the charging cable con- age the insulating protective cover. nector or the charging cable socket. RDo not pull on the charging cable. RDo not make any changes or modifica- RDo not touch the charging cable in thun- tions to the charging cable. der and lightning. Since the vehicle's high-voltage electrical RDo not handle the charging cable con- system is under high voltage, observe the nector and the charging cable socket following: with wet hands. Rdo not tamper with high-voltage compo- RDo not use the charging cable for any nents or the orange cables of the vehicle's other purpose than to charge the high- high-voltage electrical system voltage battery. Rnever touch the high-voltage components ROnly use the supplied charging cable to or the orange cables of the high-voltage charge the high-voltage battery. electrical system in a vehicle which has been involved in an accident RIf you notice an unusual odour develop, or notice smoke or burn marks, stop

Z 72 Charging the high-voltage battery

Rnever touch any damaged components or The different versions of charging cables are the damaged orange cables of the vehicle's distinguished by their charging cable con- high-voltage electrical system nectors. Charging cables which are charged Rdo not remove the covers of the high-volt- at a mains socket also have controls. age electrical system components that are The options listed for charging a high-volt- marked with a yellow warning sticker age battery are not available in all countries. For safety reasons, only use the charging The high-voltage battery can be charged in a cable which is supplied with the vehicle or nominal voltage range from 100 V to 480 V has been approved by smart for this vehicle. with a charging cable at a charging station or Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging. wallbox. i If possible only charge the high-voltage battery when the charge is below 80%. Useful information Charge the high-voltage battery at the latest when the charge falls below 20%. Method of operation The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage Discharged high-voltage battery >> Driving. battery for driving. The high-voltage bat- The high-voltage electrical system switches tery stores the energy needed to operate the off if the high-voltage battery is completely electric motor and releases it again. discharged. This protects the high-voltage The electric motor uses energy stored in the battery from exhaustive discharge. high-voltage battery for pulling away and accelerating. i Switching the ignition on and then off In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted can reactivate the high-voltage electrical into electrical energy by recuperation and system temporarily. The vehicle can then stored in the high-voltage battery. be parked safely. In addition to recuperation, the high-voltage Do not leave the vehicle with a discharged or battery can be charged as follows: almost fully discharged high-voltage battery for longer than 14 days. You can check Rwith the suitable charging cable at a mains the charge status in the charge level display socket while the vehicle is stationary (Y page 64). Rwith the suitable charging cable at a wallbox while the vehicle is stationary Extreme outside temperatures Rwith the suitable charging cable at a charging station while the vehicle is sta- The efficiency of the high-voltage battery is tionary temperature-dependent and is significantly reduced at low or high temperatures. In addition, the electrolytes used may freeze at very low temperatures. The LED ring in the power output display shows the power output available (Y page 64).

Energy consumption and range The available energy in the high-voltage battery is basically reduced by the following factors: : Charging cable for charging at a charging Rlow outside temperatures station or wallbox Roperating the air-conditioning system or ; Charging cable for charging at a mains heating socket Rswitching on electrical consumers Charging the high-voltage battery 73

Leaving the vehicle parked for an extended an interruption in the power supply with- period at low outdoor temperatures without out the building's circuit breaker being charging it can lead to the following: tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically. Rhigh-voltage battery output is significantly reduced After the device has triggered, switch the Rcharge times can be longer building's fuse unit on again. Otherwise, the charging process will not resume. Rrange can be significantly reduced In extreme cases, it may not be possible to start the vehicle as a result. You should Heat generated by the charging cable therefore always ensure that the high-volt- and charging cable connector age battery is fully charged or that the charging cable is connected when parking Charging cables and charging cable connec- the vehicle for an extended period of time at tors may heat up during the charging proc- low outside temperatures. ess at a power socket. As the high-voltage battery ages, the capa- In the following cases, the degree of heating city of the high-voltage battery will dimin- is within the permissible limits:

ish over the battery's lifetime. This means Rthe mains supply and charging cable >> Driving. that the maximum range and the maximum infrastructure are intact acceleration are reduced. Rthe instructions for handling the charging cable and control panel of the charging Battery care cable are observed If heating up beyond the permissible limits Observe the following notes on battery care: occurs, have the mains supply infrastructure Ravoid storing or transporting the vehicle checked. in high temperatures over a long period (e.g. container transport). Disposing of a charging cable Rconnect the vehicle to a power supply when parking it for an extended period of Do not dispose of a charging cable with time. household rubbish, give it to a suitable recycling service. Abide by the potential legal RTemperatures below Ò25 † for more than requirements for recycling. seven days can cause irreversible damage to the vehicle due to frost damage.

Terms of use Observe the information on exceptions and limitations in the warranty documentation and in the Service Booklet.

Voltage surge protector ! Overvoltage in the mains supply can damage the vehicle. The vehicle is therefore equipped with a device which protects it from overvoltage in the mains supply. This device may be triggered during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may lead to the building's circuit breaker being tripped and an interruption in the power supply. These functions protect the vehicle. After the building's circuit breaker is switched on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following

Z 74 Charging the high-voltage battery

Understanding the vehicle socket Charging the battery at a charging station or wall box Vehicle socket overview Charging stations without communications functionality Charging stations without communications functionality must be activated before charging, e.g. by using an RFID card. Observe the notes provided by the charging station operator.

Charging stations with communication capabilities (Plug&Charge) If the vehicle is connected to a charging station with communication capabilities, infor-

>> Driving. mation and technical parameters are exchanged so that the charging process can be started without additional activation. This function is called "Plug&Charge". Due to the data transfer, it may take up to : Charge socket flap 30 seconds after the charging cable is con- ; Socket cap nected before charging begins. = Locking mechanism i International Standard ISO 15118 is used ? Indicator lamp for the communication between the vehicle A Vehicle socket and the intelligent charging station. A suitable electricity contract is required in Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket order to use "Plug&Charge". To arrange this, When the indicator lamp on the vehicle contact the charging station operator. socket lights up, this means the following: Connecting a charging cable Indicator lamp Flashes High-voltage battery is green slowly charging. Lights up High-voltage battery is green fully charged. Flashes Vehicle waiting for charg- orange ing to start. slowly Flashes Vehicle is paused from orange charging. Flashes red A malfunction occurred quickly during charging.

: Charge socket flap ; Socket cap Charging the high-voltage battery 75

= Locking mechanism X Press the % button on the key. ? Indicator lamp The indicator lamp ? above vehicle A Vehicle socket socket A goes out. Vehicle socket A unlocks audibly. X Wallbox without a pre-installed cable or charging station: before using the charg- X Disconnect the charging cable within ing cable for the first time, remove the 60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other- adhesive tape, which holds the cable wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle together. socket. The connector locking mechanism on the X Fully unwind the charging cable before charging. charging station is opened. Close socket cap ;. X Engage transmission position j. X Close charge socket flap :. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition X lock and remove it. X Wallbox without a pre-mounted cable or Open socket flap : ( page 74). charging station: if necessary, disconnect X Y the charging cable from the wallbox and X Release locking mechanism = on socket stow it in the charging cable bag cap ;. ( page 78). >> Driving. Socket cap ; opens. Y X Wallbox without a preinstalled cable: insert the charging cable connector into the wallbox socket to the stop. Understanding the charging cable for mains sockets X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket A to the stop. The vehicle socket locks audibly. Useful information The high-voltage battery is charged and ! Only use the charging cable to charge the the indicator lamp on the vehicle high-voltage battery. Do not use the socket slowly flashes green. charging cable for other purposes. It may otherwise be damaged. i The high-voltage battery is fully charged when the indicator lamp on Depending on the vehicle version, the vehicle the vehicle socket lights up green. is equipped with different charging cable versions. Charging cable versions differ in i The vehicle must not be moved during their controls. charging. The gear lever cannot be shifted Only use a charging cable which is approved from position j. by smart for this vehicle. i Depending on the temperature, the Do not leave the charging cable control panel engine cooling system and battery cooling hanging loose from a mains socket. Other- system may audibly switch on during the wise, this could lead to a bad contact with the charging process. mains socket and to malfunctions when charging the vehicle. Removing the charging cable Never lift or carry the control panel by the charging cable connector or the mains plug. The charging cable may be removed when the Only for charging cable version 1: before charging process has completed or has been charging at a mains socket, check the maxi- cancelled. mum permissible charge current for the corresponding mains socket or building. The ! Always disconnect the charging cable maximum value of the charge current is set to from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect- the country-specific setting for the supplied ing the charging cable from the stationary charging cable. When charging abroad, the socket first could damage the charging maximum value may exceed that of the coun- cable connector. try you are in. Observe the regulations specific to the country you are in if charging abroad. Consult a qualified specialist work-

Z 76 Charging the high-voltage battery

shop if you have questions about charge cur- Indicator lamp ? rent settings or a malfunction. Flashes red An internal malfunction Controls of charging cable version 1 quickly has occurred. The high- voltage battery cannot be charged. The infrastructure has a malfunction. The high- voltage battery cannot be charged.

If the control element detects a fault current or a malfunction, the charging process is interrupted. The charging process will be resumed automatically when the malfunction has been rectified.

>> Driving. : Voltage indicator lamp ; Charging process indicator lamp Controls of charging cable version 2 = Indicator lamp temperature monitor ? Electrical fuse and control system indicator lamp The indicator lamps on the charging cable indicate the following: Indicator lamp : Lights up Voltage is switched on. The white high-voltage battery can be charged.

Indicator lamp for charge current setting Indicator lamp ; : ; Voltage indicator lamp Flashes High-voltage battery is = Charging process indicator lamp green charging. ? Electrical fuse and control system indicator lamp Indicator lamp = A Button for setting the charge current The indicator lamps on the charging cable Lights up With flashing green indica- indicate the following: red tor lamp ;: the charge output is reduced due to over- Indicator lamp : temperature. Lights up Value is set as the desired Without flashing green green charging current. indicator lamp ;: charging was terminated due to Flashes Depending on the mains overtemperature on the orange socket, the value cannot be charging cable. set as the desired charging current. Flashes red Charging was terminated due to overtemperature on the mains socket. Charging the high-voltage battery 77

charging cable version 2. This may protect Indicator lamp ; the mains supply from overloads. Lights up Voltage is switched on. The The maximum setting value and the adjust- green high-voltage battery can ment values may vary from country to coun- be charged. try. The preset default value is the minimum setting. This is the minimum charge current Indicator lamp = available from the mains supply. Lights up High-voltage battery is If the charging cable is left connected to the green charging. power socket, the currently selected values will be used for the next charging process. If Flashes Connection to vehicle has the charging cable is removed from the power orange been made. socket, the values will be reset to the minimum setting for the next charging process. Check the maximum permissible charge Indicator lamp X ? current for the relevant power socket.

Lights up The current at the control X Insert the mains plug into the mains >> Driving. red panel is not correct. The socket. high-voltage battery can- You have one minute to set the charge cur- not be charged. rent. X Press button A repeatedly until the indi- For transportation, wrap the charging cable cator lamp in the desired setting lights up around the control panel or secure it to the green. control panel housing. The desired value has been set. i After one minute, the charge current can Setting the charging current (only only be set by restarting. To do so, remove charging cable version 2) the charging cable from the mains supply and reinsert it into the mains socket. G WARNING If the charge current draw via a mains socket is too high during the charging process, the external mains supply may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Before charging, check the maximum permissible charge current available at the location. If necessary, contact a qualified specialist company for assistance. Adjust your vehicle's settings, if necessary.

! If the charge current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat. Check if the external mains supply is equipped to handle the programmed charge current. If necessary, reduce the programmed charge current or use a different mains socket. You can only limit the charging current for charging the high-voltage battery with

Z 78 Charging the high-voltage battery

Charging the battery using a mains i The vehicle must not be moved during socket charging. The gear lever cannot be shifted from position j. Connecting a charging cable i Depending on the temperature, the engine cooling system and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. i Only for charging cable version 2: if charging the vehicle's high-voltage battery is taking longer than usual, check the maximum charge current settings.

Removing the charging cable ! Always disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect-

>> Driving. ing the charging cable from the stationary socket first could damage the charging cable connector. The charging cable can be removed when the high-voltage battery is completely charged or charging has to be interrupted. : Charge socket flap ; Socket cap X Press the % button on the key. = Locking mechanism The indicator lamp ? above vehicle ? Indicator lamp socket A goes out. Vehicle socket A unlocks audibly. A Vehicle socket X Disconnect the charging cable within X Fully unwind the charging cable before 60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other- charging. wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle X Engage transmission position j. socket. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition X Close socket cap ;. lock and remove it. X Close charge socket flap :. Open socket flap : ( page 74). X Y X Remove the charging cable from the mains X Release locking mechanism = on socket socket. cap ;. X Stow the charging cable safely in the Socket cap ; opens. charging cable bag (Y page 78). X Insert the mains plug into the mains socket to the stop. X Only for charging cable version 2: set the Storing the charging cable desired charge current. X Insert the charging cable connector into ! The charging cable must be stowed in the vehicle socket A to the stop. charging cable bag only to prevent it from The vehicle socket locks audibly. being thrown around inside the vehicle. The high-voltage battery is charged and X Stow the charging cable in the charging the indicator lamp on the vehicle cable bag. socket slowly flashes green. The charging cable bag is located in the boot i The high-voltage battery is fully (Y page 145). charged when the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket lights up green permanently. Switching on the lighting 79

Switching on the lighting X Turn combination switch control : to the Ã position. Useful information When one or more of the following occurs, the The driver must ensure that the light set- lights are switched off automatically: tings match the current weather, light and RThe engine is switched off. traffic conditions. RThe driver's door is opened. For reasons of safety, smart recommends that RThe vehicle is locked. you drive with the daytime driving lights or dipped-beam headlamps switched on even RThe main-beam headlamps are not during the daytime. switched on when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone sounds if the lights are still on when you leave the vehicle. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and Switching on the dipped-beam head- self-imposed obligations. lamps X Turn combination switch control : to the L position. The L indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Switching the main-beam headlamps on or off

: Combination switch control ; Marking >> Ensuring good visibility.

Activating automatic headlamp mode

G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be The engine must be running. switched on automatically if there is fog, Turn the combination switch control to the snow or other causes of poor visibility due X Ã or K position. to the weather conditions such as spray. To switch on: press the combination switch There is a risk of an accident. X in the direction of arrow 1. In such situations, turn the light switch to X To switch off: move the combination switch L. back to its original position.

While the engine is running, the light setting The K indicator lamp in the instrument is selected automatically according to the cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. brightness of the ambient light. Ã controls the daytime driving lights, side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.

Z 80 Adjusting the lighting

Using the headlamp flasher Using the cornering light function

X Pull the combination switch in the direc- Only vehicles with the LED & Sensor package tion of arrow 2. are equipped with the cornering light function. The cornering light function uses the front Switching on the side lamps foglamps to improve the illumination of the road in the direction in which you are turn- X Turn combination switch control : to the ing, enabling better visibility in tight bends, T position. for example. The following conditions must be fulfilled for the cornering light function to switch on Switching the foglamps and rear fog- automatically: lamp on and off Rthe dipped-beam headlamps are switched on Only vehicles with front foglamps have the Rthe vehicle is moving at less than "Foglamps" function. 40 km/h Rthe turn signal is switched on or the steering wheel is turned

Adjusting the lighting Adjusting the headlamp range The vehicle load can affect the headlamp range. This can impair visibility, and the headlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic.

>> Ensuring good visibility. : Combination switch middle ring ; Marking Switch on the ignition and either the side lamps or the dipped beam headlamps in order to switch on the fog lamps. Start the engine and switch on either the side lamps or dipped beam headlamps in order to switch on the rear foglamp. X To switch on or off manually: turn combination switch middle ring : to the desired marking: The ignition must be switched on in order to RO Foglamps set the headlamp range. R R Rear foglamp X Turn headlamp range adjuster : to the After releasing, the combination switch mid- position which corresponds to the load in dle ring returns automatically to the neutral your vehicle. position. Rg: Driver's seat occupied or driver's The foglamps and rear foglamp also switch seat and front-passenger seat occupied off automatically in the following situations: R1: Other loading Rthe lights are switched off. Rthe engine is switched off and the control is in the Ã position. Using the windscreen wipers 81

Adjusting the dipped-beam headlamps The interior lighting can be activated when a to left-hand and right-hand traffic door is open. After closing the doors, the interior lighting goes out. The symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps are required when travelling in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to that in which the vehicle is registered. Unlike the asymmetrical dipped- beam headlamps, these headlamps do not dazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps provide less illumination to the edge of the carriageway.

X Press switch : to activate or deactivate the left-hand reading lamp. X Move switch ; to the desired position: Rinterior lighting switched on Rinterior lighting controlled automatically Rinterior lighting switched off X Press switch = to activate or deactivate X Open the service cover. the right-hand reading lamp. X Turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go: Rto X for symmetrical dipped-beam Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour headlamps display) >> Ensuring good visibility. Rto W for asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps On-board computer with colour display: the ambient lighting is set in the on-board com- X Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting checked at a qualified specialist work- puter (Y page 103). shop. Using the windscreen wipers Using the interior lighting Switching on the windscreen wipers Switching the interior lighting on and Please note off ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers The interior lights go on when you unlock the when the windscreen is dry, as this could doors. damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust The interior lights switch off in the following that has collected on the windscreen can situations: scratch the glass if wiping takes place RA door is opened and 15 minutes have when the windscreen is dry. passed. If it is necessary to switch on the wind- RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has been screen wipers in dry weather conditions, locked and 15 seconds have passed. always operate them using washer fluid. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has not ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- been locked and 4 minutes have passed. screen becomes dirty in dry weather con- RThe engine has been started. ditions, the windscreen wipers may be

Z 82 Using the windscreen wipers

activated inadvertently. This could dam- Switching on intermittent wiping age the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. X Press the combination switch to the © For this reason, you should always switch position. off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are free of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor may Wiping with washer fluid overheat. X Pull the combination switch in the direc- Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear. tion of arrow î. smart recommends replacing the wiper blades twice a year. Worn or damaged wiper blades cause smearing on the windscreen. On vehicles with a rain sensor, malfunctions are Switching the rear window wiper on then possible. and off (smart fortwo coupé)

Switching continuous wipe on and off

To operate the rear window wiper, the ignition must be switched on. >> Ensuring good visibility. : Control for wipe frequency X Turn the outer control on the combination u Continuous wipe, off switch to the desired position: © Automatic wipe R$ Rear window wiper off 1 Continuous wipe, slow Rè Rear window wiper on 2 Continuous wipe, fast Rî Wipes with washer fluid î Wiping with washer fluid The ignition must be switched on in order to operate the windscreen wipers. Switching the rear window wiper on X Press the combination switch down or up and off when in reverse gear (smart to the desired position. fortwo coupé) You can switch the "Automatic rear window Automatic wipe (vehicles with rain sen- wiper when reversing" setting on or off in the sor) smart Media-System. The rear window wiper is automatically activated for a short while The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is when the ignition is switched on, the window responsible for ensuring good visibility at wipers are switched on and reverse gear is all times. engaged. X Press the combination switch to the © X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle position. In automatic wipe mode, the > Settings > Auto rear wipe with appropriate wiping frequency is set reverse gear. according to the intensity of the rain. The selected setting is highlighted. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. X Confirm the setting with Done. Folding the sun visor to the side 83

Folding the sun visor to the side

: Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror

X Fold the sun visor down. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Fold the sun visor to one side >> Ensuring good visibility.

Z 84 Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside

Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside Using the door handle to unlock the door

X To lock: press button :. When the doors are locked, indicator lamp ; lights up. X To unlock: press button :.

X Pull door handle :. If the vehicle has previously been locked Activating and deactivating the auto- with the key, opening a door from the inside matic locking feature will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To The activated automatic locking feature disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. locks the vehicle automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is moving. Centrally locking and unlocking the X When the engine is running, press and vehicle from the inside hold button : for 5 seconds until a tone sounds. G WARNING When the automatic locking function is If children are left unsupervised in the activated, the locking mechanism engages vehicle, they can: audibly when you pull away. When the automatic locking function is deactivated, Ropen doors and endanger other persons no sound occurs. or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for Activating the double-lock function example, trap themselves. For United Kingdom only: the double-lock Children could also set the vehicle in function prevents the doors from being motion, for example by: opened from the inside. Rreleasing the parking brake G WARNING >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Rshifting the automatic transmission out When the double locks are activated, the of park position P doors can no longer be opened from the Rstarting the engine. inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There There is a risk of an accident and injury. is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- key with you and lock the vehicle. Never pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- leave children unattended in the vehicle. dren, elderly people or people in need of Always keep the key out of reach of children. Opening and closing the windows 85

special assistance. Do not activate the Opening and closing the windows double lock when people are in the vehicle. Please note WARNING G G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are While closing the side windows, body parts exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged in the closing area could become trapped. period, there is a risk of serious or even There is a risk of injury. fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- When closing make sure that no parts of ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- the body are in the closing area. If some- cle. body becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window X Press button : twice. The double-lock function is enabled. again.

G WARNING Understanding the reversing feature Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly Vehicles with automatic operation: the side when unattended. There is a risk of injury. windows are equipped with an automatic When leaving the vehicle, always take the reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or key with you and lock the vehicle. Never restricts a side window from closing during automatic operation, the side window opens leave children unattended in the vehicle. again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens G WARNING again automatically after the corresponding If you close a side window again immedi- switch is released. The automatic reversing ately after it has been blocked or reset, the feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for operating the side windows safely. side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then G WARNING not active. Parts of the body could be trap- The reversing feature does not react: ped in the closing area in the process. This Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small poses an increased risk of injury or even fingers fatal injury. Rwhile adjusting Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing proc- This means that the reversing feature can- ess, release the switch or push the switch not prevent someone being trapped in again to reopen the side window. these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no body Vehicles with automatic operation: the switches for both side windows are located

parts are in the closing area. If someone >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. becomes trapped, press the W button to on the driver's door. There is also a switch for open the side window again. the front-passenger window on the front- passenger door. The switch on the driver’s door takes precedence.

Z 86 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

Opening and closing the windows Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) Please note

G WARNING During opening and closing of the folding top or rear soft top, body parts may become trapped for example, by the roof mechan- ical system. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that no parts of the body are in the immediate vicinity of moving parts during the closing or opening process. Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes Vehicles with automatic operation trapped. : Left side window ; Right side window ! When transporting long objects in the vehicle interior, make sure that these do not press against the folding roof when it is closed. When transporting objects that extend beyond the rear, make sure that these do not rest on the rear soft top fasteners (brackets). During loading, make sure that objects with sharp edges do not come into contact with the soft top or the rear window. If the rear soft top is lowered, do not dis- tribute a weight in excess of 75 kg on top of Vehicles without automatic operation it. To open: press the switch. Make sure that the third brake lamp is not X covered. X To close: pull the switch. ! Make sure that the lock openings of the soft-top system are not blocked. Stow the side spars only in the intended stowage Opening and closing windows fully in compartment in the tailgate. automatic mode ! Make sure that objects in the luggage Vehicles with automatic operation: compartment are not stacked too high. X To open the windows fully, press the They could otherwise be damaged when switch beyond the point of resistance and the rear soft top is opened or closed. release it. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. The procedure for removing, fitting and X To close the windows fully, pull the switch stowing the side bars is described below. The beyond the point of resistance and release QR code is a link to a video clip that demon- it. strates the procedure. X To stop automatic operation, press the switch again. Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 87

Opening and closing the soft top X To release: slide lever : back. The side bar is unlocked. X Push lever : back again and remove side bars ;.

Stowing the side bars

G WARNING If you transport the side bars without securing them, they may be thrown around in the event of an accident, braking or sudden changes in direction. There is a risk of To open or close the soft top, the ignition injury. must be switched on. Always stow the side bars in the designa- X To open: press the switch to position ; ted stowage well and close the stowage until the soft top is in the desired position. well lid. Press switch ; again to fully open the soft top. ! When the rear soft top is lowered, the side X To close: press the switch to position : support beams could be stolen. Therefore, until the soft top is in the desired position. remove the side support beams and stow It is possible to open or close the soft top them in the luggage compartment or close while driving up to the maximum design the soft top. speed. In poor weather and at high speeds, it ! If you load the stowage space it could be is possible that electric locking when closing damaged. is not reliable. If this is the case you must reduce the speed and, if necessary, press the Never stow heavy objects on the stowage switch again to close the soft top. space or sit on it. Please note: Ronly use the stowage space to store the Opening the soft top (using the key) side bars Ralways place both side bars in the stowage X Press and hold the é button on the key. space

Removing the side bars

X Open the soft top X Open the doors and tailgate. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Observe the notice on the stowage space. X Release fastening straps : on the stowage space and guide the locking mechanism

Z 88 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

with your hand until the fastening straps X Close the cover. are released. The cover must audibly engage. X Open cover ;. X Secure both fastening straps with ten- X Store the side bars as shown (observe sioner : on rear detent ;. markings L and R on the side bars and the The red surfaces at the side must no longer stowage compartment for the left and right be visible. An audible click can be heard side bars): upon engaging. X Close the tailgate. X If the tailgate does not close properly, check if the side bars have been stored as specified.

Fitting the side bars

G WARNING If the side bars are incorrectly mounted they may become loose during the journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of accident and injury. Mount the side bars as described.

X Open the doors and tailgate. X Release the fastening straps on the stowage space and guide the locking mechanism with your hand until the fastening straps are released. X Open the cover. X Remove the side bars.

: Side bar, front left ; Side bar, rear left = Side bar, front right ? Side bar, rear right >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

X Insert the side bar from the stowage compartment marked L on the left side at the front end :. X Press down rear end of side bar ; until it engages twice. X Fit the side bar from the stowage compartment marked R on the right-hand side. Operating the climate control system 89

Closing the stowage space without the Fitting and removing the draught stop side bars (smart fortwo cabrio) Fitting the draught stop

X Move folding mechanism : in the direction of the arrow. X Close cover ;.

X Open the soft top completely. X Attach recesses : of draught stop = on to hooks ; on the roll bar. X Attach loops A on to hooks ? in the side panelling.

Removing the draught stop X Secure both fastening straps with tensioner : on front detent ;. X Unhook loops A from hooks ? in the side The red surfaces at the side must no longer panelling. be visible. An audible click can be heard X Unhook recesses : from hooks ; on the upon engaging. roll bar. X Close the tailgate.

Operating the climate control system Useful information

The climate control system is only available >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. when the ignition is switched on. If the climate control system is deactivated, the air supply and circulation are switched off. The windows could mist up. You should therefore switch off the climate control system for brief periods only. In air-recirculation mode, only the air inside the vehicle is recirculated and no fresh air is introduced. This is useful in a tunnel or when there are unpleasant odours outside the

Z 90 Operating the climate control system

vehicle. In air-recirculation mode, the win- Setting and switching the air distribu- dows may mist up more quickly, particularly tion off when the outside temperature is low. There- fore, switch on air-recirculation mode only X Press one or more of the ¯, P, O briefly. buttons. The integrated filter in the climate control R¯ Demister vents system keeps out most particles of dust as RP Centre and side air vents well as pollen. The filter reduces the amount RO Footwell vents of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, always observe the interval for replacing the filter. Increasing the blower speed

X Press the K button. Operating the automatic climate control system Decreasing the blower speed Switching the automatic climate control X Press the I button. system on and off Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

X Press the À button. The indicator lamp above À lights up when air-recirculation mode is activated.

Switching "Cooling with air dehumidification" on or off The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle during warm weather. The ignition must be switched on in order to The engine must be running in order to use operate the blower. The engine must be run- "Cooling with air dehumidification". ning in order to operate all the functions of X To switch on: press the K and the automatic climate control system. ¿ button. X To switch on: press the Ã button. The indicator lamp below ¿ lights up The indicator lamps below Ã and when the function is activated. ¿ light up. In damp weather, only switch off the "Cooling X To switch off: press the ^ button. with air dehumidification" function briefly. The indicator lamp below ^ lights up. Otherwise the windows can mist up more quickly.

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Setting the temperature Demisting the windscreen X Move the slider in small increments to the left or right. X Press the ¬ button. In automatic mode, the set temperature is The indicator lamp above ¬ lights up maintained at a constant level. The air dis- when the windscreen is being demisted. tribution and blower speed are regulated Use this setting only until the windscreen is automatically. clear again. Operating the climate control system 91

Demisting the rear window Rno pre-selection The pre-entry climate control is deacti- When the rear window heating is activated, vated. the exterior mirrors are also heated. RTwo stored departure times Press the ¤ button. X Activate The indicator lamp above ¤ lights up X Departure time > select to acti- when the rear window heating is activated. vate the stored departure time. If Smart- Charging was selected before, this setting Use this setting only until the rear window is is also activated. clear again. X Departure time > select Change to change the settings of a stored departure time. Drying windows that are misted up on the X Set the value. inside X Select Smart-Charging or instant charg‐ ing. X Press the ¿ button. Press the Ã button. A display message is shown with the selec- X ted settings. X If the windows are still misted up, press the ¬ button. If Smart-Charging is selected, the high- voltage battery charges at minimum cost Use this setting only until the windows are while also conserving battery life. clear again. Depending on the set departure time, charging of the high-voltage battery may Drying windows that are misted up on the not start immediately or may be interrup- outside ted during the charging process.

X Switch on the windscreen wipers. i The charging station must support the Press the ¬ button. transmission of tariff information in order X for the optimised charging process with Use this setting only until the windows are Smart-Charging to be possible. If the clear again. charging station does not provide tariff information, set the preferred charging Setting the pre-entry climate control at times on the "smart control" website. departure time using the on-board com- i If instant charging is selected, the puter high-voltage battery is charged regardless of the cost information. A part of the Only for instrument cluster with colour dis- charging may not be conducted until play: one to two hours before the departure time, The "Pre-entry climate control at departure in order for temperature control of the time" function heats or cools the vehicle high-voltage battery to be carried out for interior before the scheduled departure time. the intended departure time. The climate control runs until approx. 10 minutes after the set departure time. The vehicle must be connected to the charger Adjusting the air vents

in order to activate pre-entry climate con- >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. trol. The battery charge and the charge out- Please note put of the high-voltage battery must be sufficient. G WARNING If pre-entry climate control cannot be oper- Very hot or very cold air can flow from the ated, a display message is shown in the on- board computer. air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the X Call up Pre-heat/cool and charge in the on-board computer. air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants X Press a. always maintain a sufficient distance to X Select one of the following settings:

Z 92 Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating

the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the Activating/deactivating the seat heat- airflow to another area of the vehicle inte- ing and steering wheel heating rior. G WARNING G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant can cause the seat cushion, the backrest into the vehicle's ventilation system, it pad and parts of the steering wheel to may ignite. There is a risk of fire. become very hot. The health of persons Never spray these or other agents into the with limited temperature sensitivity or a ventilation system. Always have work on limited ability to react to higher tempera- the ventilation system carried out at a tures may be affected or they may even qualified specialist workshop. suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Keep the following rules in mind for optimal Therefore, do not switch the seat heating climate control: on repeatedly. RKeep the air slots between the service cover and windscreen clear of blockages. ! When the seat heating is switched on, the RDo not cover the vents or ventilation grilles seat surface can be damaged as a result of in the vehicle interior. objects being placed on the seats; for ROpen the air vents fully. example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Opening and closing the air vents Mercedes-Benz. Ensure that there are no objects on the seat surface when the seat heating is switched on.

X To open 1: turn the vent outwards. X To close 2: turn the vent inwards. The seat heating only works when the igni- Directing the air vents tion is switched on. Vehicles with the Winter >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. package are additionally equipped with the X Turn the air vents upwards, downwards, to "Steering wheel heating" : function. the left or to the right as desired. X Press button =. Indicator lamp ; lights up when seat heating is activated. Vehicles with the Winter package: steering wheel heating : is also switched on when the driver's seat heating is activated. Using the accessories 93

Using the accessories Using the cigarette lighter

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls X To open: lift up cover :. Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to To close: push down cover . objects, for example X : To remove: pull the ashtray up and out. There is a risk of fire and injury. X X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup Always hold the cigarette lighter by the holder. knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Using the 12 V socket

The cigarette lighter only works when the X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition ignition is switched on. lock. X Press cigarette lighter :. X Lift up the cover of socket :. When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops up X Connect the device. automatically. The socket can be used for accessories up to a maximum draw of 120 W (15 A). If you use the socket for very long periods

Using the ash tray when the engine is switched off, the 12 V >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. battery may discharge. ! The cup holder in the centre console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder. Fitting and removing the floormats Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. G WARNING Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- Objects in the driver's footwell may aged. restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises

Z 94 Using the accessories

the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To install: press securing knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: release securing knobs : from retainers ;. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Using the reversing camera 95

Parking The parking aid uses three sensors : in the rear bumper to monitor the area around the Please note vehicle. The parking aid measures the distance G WARNING between the vehicle and an obstacle. If the When the engine is switched off, the auto- proximity to the object behind the vehicle is matic transmission shifts into neutral less than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued. If the object is less than 30 cm away, a contin- position N. The vehicle may roll away. uous warning tone is issued. There is a risk of an accident. The parking aid might not function correctly Always shift to parking position P before under the following circumstances: switching off the engine. Secure the parked Ron uneven terrain vehicle against rolling away by applying Rif there are obstacles below or above the the parking brake. sensor detection range Rnear snow or objects that absorb ultra- ! Always secure the vehicle correctly sonic waves against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehi- >> Parking and getting out. cle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Rclose to sources of strong ultrasonic radiation, such as pneumatic drills If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated. Switching off the engine

X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. Deactivating/activating the parking X Turn the key to position u in the ignition aid lock and remove it. X On steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

Using the parking aid Useful information ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situations. The electronic parking aid gives an acoustic The parking aid is automatically activated indication of the distance between the vehi- when you start the engine. cle and an obstacle behind it. X Press the switch. When the parking aid is deactivated, the LED on the switch lights up.

Using the reversing camera Please note The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with

Z 96 Using the reversing camera

you. Make sure that there are no persons, The reversing camera might show a distorted animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or area while manoeuvring or parking. not at all if: ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, Rthe obstacle is very close to the rear consult a qualified specialist workshop bumper and have the reversing camera checked. Rthe obstacle is underneath the rear bumper ! Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually Rthe obstacle is close to the tailgate handle are, for example: Rthe reversing camera is covered by additional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rack Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind The function of the reversing camera might Rthe drawbar of a trailer be limited: Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rif the tailgate is open Rthe tail-end of a lorry Rif there is snow or heavy rain Rslanted posts Rin the dark >> Parking and getting out. Only use the image from the reversing camera as a guide. You may otherwise Rif a very bright light outshines the camera damage your vehicle and/or the object. Rif there is fluorescent light, e.g. from fluorescent lamps or LED lighting Rif there is a rapid change of temperature Understanding the reverse camera Rif the camera lens is dirty functions ! Pay attention to people and obstacles Guide lines in the display when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situations. Useful information ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, ! Objects that are not at ground level consult a qualified specialist workshop appear further away than they actually and have the reversing camera checked. are, for example: The reversing camera is a visual parking and Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the smart Rthe drawbar of a trailer Media-System display. Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe tail-end of a lorry Rslanted posts Only use the image from the reversing camera as a guide. You may otherwise damage your vehicle and/or the object. Guide lines in different colours show the distance of obstacles from the rear of the vehicle. Static guide lines do not change when the steering wheel is turned. Dynamic guide lines change depending on the position of the steering wheel.

Reversing camera : is located above the licence plate in the tailgate. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image in the smart Media-System display. Locking the vehicle 97

RSwitch Rear camera view on or off. RSwitch Static guidelines on or off. RSwitch Dynamic guidelines on or off. X Confirm with Done.

Adjusting reversing camera display settings

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle > Settings > Rear camera > Image : Static: vehicle width including exterior settings. mirrors X Adjust the values for Brightness, Satura‐ ; Green, static: approx. 1.50 m tion and Contrast. = Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m X Confirm the display settings with Done. ? Red, static: approx. 0.3 m >> Parking and getting out. A Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including exterior mirrors Locking the vehicle The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the Activating the reversing camera vehicle, they could: The ignition must be switched on to use the Ropen doors, thereby endangering other reversing camera. persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle > Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera Roperate vehicle equipment and become view settings > Rear camera view. trapped, for example X Confirm with Done. In addition, the children could also set the X Engage reverse gear. vehicle in motion by, for example: The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the smart Media-System Rreleasing the parking brake display. Rshifting the transmission out of park position P Rstarting the vehicle's drive system Switching off the reversing camera There is a risk of an accident and injury. After driving forwards briefly, the reversing When leaving the vehicle, always take the camera will turn itself off. key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach Adjusting the reversing camera set- of children. tings Press the & button on the key. X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle X > Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera The turn signals flash twice. view settings. X To select the desired settings:

Z 98 Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system

Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system Useful information The immobiliser prevents the vehicle from being started without the correct key. It is switched on and off automatically. The anti-theft alarm system triggers a visual and audible alarm if a door, the tailgate or the service cover is opened. The alarm is not switched off, even if, for example, you close the open door that has triggered it.

>> Parking and getting out. Priming

X Close the doors. X Close the tailgate. X Close the service cover. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approximately 30 seconds.

Deactivating and switching off the alarm

X Press the % button on the key. Overview of the on-board computer 99

Overview of the on-board computer Monochrome display overview Please note

G WARNING If you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be : Time sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- ; Transmission display tion to road and traffic conditions and = Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp operate the equipment with the vehicle ? Outside temperature display and black stationary. ice warning Ò A Trip meter, remaining range, service dis- >> Operating the on-board computer. G WARNING play If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- B Tyre pressure monitor functioned, you may not recognise func- C eco score display tion restrictions relevant to safety. The D Brake lamp failure warning lamp operating safety of your vehicle may be E Total distance recorder impaired. There is a risk of an accident. F Cruise control, limiter Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Colour display overview

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, you must park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and displays in the instrument cluster are only shown for certain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers are responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is operating safely. A vehicle which is not operating safely can cause an accident. The display shows the outside temperature on the far right in the header. Drivers must Time pay special attention to road conditions : when temperatures are around freezing ; Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp point. Changes in the outside temperature = Digital speedometer are displayed after a short delay. ? Outside temperature display with black After opening the door, the on-board com- ice warning Ò puter is activated for approximately A Display field for display messages, 15 minutes. To permanently activate the on- menus and lists board computer, the ignition must be B Remaining range switched on. C ECO mode, radar-based recuperation

Z 100 Calling up displays

D Transmission display Calling up displays (colour display) E Cruise control, limiter Calling up displays

Calling up displays Calling up displays (monochrome display) >> Operating the on-board computer.

: Colour display ; Left control panel

X Briefly press 9 or : on left control panel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards. X Press and hold 9 or : on left control : Monochrome display panel ;, to directly call up the Distance ; Buttons on the multifunction lever display. X To scroll forward at menu level, briefly The following displays can be called up one press the ´ button on multifunction after another: lever. RDistance X To directly call up the trip meter, press and hold the ´ button on multifunction RTrip computer from start lever. RTrip computer from reset X Press and hold a on the multifunction Reco score from start lever to reset the values. RFuel consumption bar chart The following displays can be called up one REnergy flow after another: RPre-heat/cool and charge Rtrip meter RMessages and service Rremaining range RSettings Rservice due date RDigital speedometer Rsetting the time Ractivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Rrestarting the tyre pressure monitor Calling up displays 101

Distance display When the eco score display is reset, the from start trip computer in the smart Media-Sys- tem and the eco score display are also reset in the smart Media-System.

Fuel consumption bar chart display

: Trip meter ; Total distance recorder

Trip computer display : Energy consumption ; Recuperation The display shows the average energy consumption and recuperation over the previous

15 minutes. >> Operating the on-board computer.

Energy flow display : Elapsed time ; Distance = Average speed ? Average energy consumption The data in the from start menu refers to the start of the journey, whilst the data in the from reset menu refers to the last time the submenu was reset. Total output If the ignition remains switched off for lon- : ger than four hours, the from start values in ; Output for electrical consumers the instrument cluster are reset. The eco The total output shows the driver the sum of score display is also reset automatically. the energy currently flowing from the battery. The colour of the battery shows whether eco score display energy is being consumed or recuperated: RBattery symbol is orange: energy is being consumed. RBattery symbol is green: energy is being recuperated. RBattery symbol is grey: energy consumption and recuperation are equal or both at 0 kW. The output for electrical consumers shows The eco score display provides feedback on the driver what output is needed to operate how economical the driver's driving behav- electrical consumers, e.g. climate control iour is ( page 64). systems or the radio. If the value is kept as Y low as possible, a greater range is achieved. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the eco score display will be automatically reset.

Z 102 Setting values

Pre-entry climate control and charging Digital speedometer display display The display shows the digital speedometer. The digital speedometer in the header is hidden. United Kingdom only: the digital speedometer in the header continues to be displayed.

Setting values : Time of the full charge Setting values (monochrome display) ; Charge status of the battery = Departure time Setting the time ? Smart-Charging X Press ´ repeatedly until ° is shown A Charge current and charge output next to the time. An arrow underneath the battery indicates X Press a until the hour display flashes. the charge status of the battery at the depar- Set values. ture time. The charge status and the time of X >> Operating the on-board computer. complete charge are only predicted approximately. The time of complete charge cannot Deactivating or activating Active Brake be displayed when Smart-Charging is acti- Assist vated. Information on the "Pre-entry climate con- X Press ´ several times until and ° are displayed. trol at departure time" function (Y page 91). X Press a until on or OFF appears below Messages and service display . The ^ indicator lamp lights up when Active Brake Assist is deactivated.

Resetting values The trip meter display and eco score display can be reset. X Scroll to the desired display. : Message memory X Press a for three seconds. ; Next service due date The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the Setting values (colour display) next service due date. ¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi- Setting values cates a major service. To show the display messages, the ignition must be switched on. X Press a to scroll through the display messages. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop. Setting values 103

X Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings. RDigital speedometer display X Press 9 or : to scroll to the desired RDigital speedometer in the header menu. England only: only the display unit of the X Press 9 or : to set the desired data. digital speedometer is set. X Press a to confirm. Setting the unit of measurement for dis- Resetting values tance

X Press a. X Select Settings > Display > Units of distance. X Select yes and press a to confirm. X Set the value Setting the time Setting the temperature unit X Select Settings > Time > Set the time. Set values. X Select Settings > Display > Units of X temperature. Vehicles with smart Media-System: the time and time format are set in the smart X Set the value Media-System. Switching radar-based recuperation off >> Operating the on-board computer. Setting the time format and on

X Select Settings > Time > 12/24 Time for‐ To switch on radar-based recuperation, the mat. conditions for activation must be fulfilled and the ignition must be switched on. X Set the value X Select Settings > Radar assist.recuper‐ ation > on or off. Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting Information on radar-based recuperation (Y page 62). X Select Settings > Display > Display/ switch brightness. Deactivating or activating Active Brake X Set the value Assist The ignition must be switched on in order to Displaying the digital speedometer in the set Active Brake Assist. header X Select Settings > Active Brake Assist > X Select Settings > Display > Digital on or off. speedometer. Information on Active Brake Assist X Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo. (Y page 51). function. The digital speedometer is displayed in Starting the tyre pressure monitor the header. England only: the digital speedometer in the X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor. header cannot be hidden. Information on the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 154). Setting the unit for speed in the digital speedometer Switching ambient lighting on/off

X Select Settings > Display> Digital X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On. speedometer > Unit. X Set the value The following values are set:

Z 104 Setting values

Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting

X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > Brightness. X Set the value

Setting the language

X Select Settings > Language (Language). X Set the value >> Operating the on-board computer. Operating and setting the smart Audio-System 105

Operating and setting the smart Audio- H $ Switches on the radio and selects System the waveband. I External audio equipment (AUX connec- smart Audio-System overview tion) J Volume control, Ü button WARNING G K F Sets the radio text If you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from Operating and setting the smart Audio- the traffic situation. This could also cause System you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a To switch on or off: press Ü. risk of an accident. X To scroll through menus: turn control B. Only operate this equipment when the X To select menu options: turn control B traffic situation permits. If you cannot be X and press the 9 button. sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- X To navigate to the next-highest folder: tion to road and traffic conditions and press the % button. operate the equipment with the vehicle X To set values: turn control B and press the stationary. 9 button. You must observe the legal requirements for X To increase or decrease the volume: turn control J. the country in which you are currently driv- >> Using the smart Audio-System. ing when operating the smart Audio-System.

Using external devices Useful information You can connect the following external devices: RUSB devices, iPods® and MP3 players (USB port) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connection) RBluetooth® devices, such as mobile phones : Number keys 1 - 6 External devices can be charged at USB ports ; C Previous station or track = and C when the ignition is switched on. It = USB1 port and bracket connection for is better to use USB port = for charging as it mobile phone with smart cross connect supplies a higher charge current. To charge app an external device remove the cover on USB ? D Next station or track port =. A % Goes back one menu level higher B Control for menu selection and station list, 9 button Using the smartphone bracket USB2 port C Useful information D Ã Telephone menu to accept or reject calls i Operating smartphones in the smart- E ª System settings phone bracket is permitted exclusively in F 8 Mute connection with the smart cross connect app. G Õ Plays back media from external data carriers

Z 106 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

The smartphone bracket keeps your mobile Inserting and removing the mobile phone phone secured in the vehicle. In order to use the smart cross connect app, rotate the X To insert: press the right-hand raised but- mobile phone to landscape mode. ton on the bottom edge of the smartphone You can use the USB port behind the smart- bracket. phone bracket on the left to charge your The upper tensioning arm opens. mobile phone during the journey. The mobile X If necessary, press the left-hand button on phone can be charged when the ignition is the bottom edge of the smartphone switched on. bracket. The smartphone bracket is suitable for The tensioning arms on the side open. mobile phones with the following dimen- X Set the mobile phone in the smartphone sions: bracket. If necessary, press the tensioning arms on Rthickness: 6 – 10 mm X the side together to set them to the size of Rwidth: 55 – 82 mm the mobile phone. Rlength: 120 – 162 mm X Press down the upper tensioning arms to Further information is available from any secure the mobile phone. smart centre. X To remove: press the right-hand raised button on the bottom edge of the smart- Removing and fastening the cover of the phone bracket. USB1 port The upper tensioning arm opens. X Remove the mobile phone from the smart- >> Using the smart Audio-System. phone bracket.

Operating the smart Audio-System via the mobile phone You can use the smart cross connect app for iOS and Android to operate the smart Audio- System via a mobile phone. X Download the smart cross connect app from the App Store® (iOS) or Google Play™ (Android) and install it on the mobile To remove: turn the cover anti-clockwise X phone. using handle :. Connect the mobile phone with the smart Press on marking ;. X X Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Remove the cover. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket. X To secure: place the cover in position ;. Further information about operating the Turn the cover clockwise using handle . X : smart Audio-System via mobile phone can be found in the smart cross connect app user's Fitting the smartphone bracket guide.

X Remove the cover from the USB1 port. X Connect the smartphone bracket to USB1 Adjusting the system settings and turn the locking mechanism clockwise. Setting the system language

X Press the ª button. X Select Language. The list of languages appears. X Select the language. Listening to the radio 107

Switching the time on or off X Select Audio Default. X Select Yes . X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle X Select ON or OFF. speed (vehicles without JBL sound system) Setting the time X Press the ª button. X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Clock. X Select Speed Vol.. X Select Set Time. X Select the desired level. X Set the time. The higher the level, the higher the volume will be at increasing road speeds. Setting the time format Press the ª button. X Listening to the radio X Select Clock. X Select Format. Switching on the radio X Choose one of the following time formats: X Press the Ü button. RAm/Pm X Press the $ button. R24hr >> Using the smart Audio-System. The smart Audio-System receives data transmitted via the Radio Data System (RDS). Adjusting the audio settings Adjusting the sound Selecting a waveband Press the ª button. X Press the $ button repeatedly until the X desired waveband appears. X Select Audio. Select Sound. If available, you can switch between the fol- X lowing wavebands: X Select the desired sound settings: RFM1 RBass: adjusts the bass. RFM2 RTreble: adjusts the treble. RDR1 (digital radio) RBal.: adjusts the surround sound (balance) to left or right. RDR2 (digital radio) RAM Switching the bass boost on or off (vehicles without JBL sound system) Selecting stations manually Press the ª button. X FM and AM waveband X Select Audio. X Select Bass Boost. X Press the D or C button to set the desired frequency. X Select ON or OFF.

Resetting audio settings Digital radio frequency range Press the ª button. X To select the desired station, press the X D or C button. X Select Audio.

Z 108 Listening to the radio

Setting a station from the station list Digital radio (if available)

X Press a in radio mode. Information on DAB The station list appears. X Select a station. i Any electronic devices taken into the Press a to confirm. vehicle may seriously impair radio and X DAB radio reception. Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad- casting) is a digital transmission standard Updating the station list optimally designed for the mobile reception X Press the $ button until you hear a of radio transmissions. Several programmes tone. are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a single frequency. Some stations only transmit programmes at certain times. If you have selected a programme that Storing a station has subsequently been removed from the Select a waveband. ensemble, it will no longer be received. You X will continue to receive the other pro- X Set the station. grammes in the ensemble. Select either a dif- X Press a number key 1 to 6 until you hear ferent programme or a different ensemble. a tone. The station set for this waveband will be i DAB cannot be received everywhere in saved at the button you have pressed. Europe. >> Using the smart Audio-System.

Displaying radio text Selecting a stored station This function provides additional data Select a waveband. transmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 and X DR2). Besides displaying the artist and track X Press a number key for the stored station. names, information on the current programme may also be available. X Press the F button. Switching traffic announcements X Select Radio text. on/off The î dot shows that radio text is activated. X Press the ª button. X Select Radio. Setting alerts X Select TA. X Select ON or OFF. If this function is activated, certain programme categories allow another broadcast to interrupt the current audio playback. Numerous categories can be selected, such as Interrupting a traffic announcement news, business news, sports news etc. X During a traffic announcement, briefly A prerequisite for the reception is that press %. broadcasters process the relevant information. This function is only available in certain countries. Displaying radio text in FM radio X Call up the setup menu (Y page 106). X Radio > DR Interrupt > Select the desired X Press the F button. category. If radio text is available, it will be dis- The î dot shows the active settings. played. i Several categories can be selected. Repeat the procedure if necessary. Using a mobile phone 109

Displaying the EPG Switching on the Bluetooth® function of EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is available the smart Audio-System in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). X Press the Ã button. If the station supports EPG, you can use the X Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to display with 9. the current and the following two radio programmes. At the very least, the programme X Turn control B to ON and confirm with 9. overview contains the name, time and length The î dot shows the active setting. of each programme. X Press the F button. Authorising a mobile phone on the smart X Select EPG. Audio-System X Select the desired station. X Press the Ã button. X Select Scan devices. Switching on Intellitext™ The system searches for available mobile phones and displays them in a list. If the station supports Intellitext™, you can Select the mobile phone and confirm with have additional information displayed, such X 9. as news, headlines, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is X Do one of the following: that broadcasters process the relevant infor- Rif a code appears in the smart Audio- mation. Intellitext™ is only available in cer- System display and on the mobile phone, tain countries. confirm it on the mobile phone >> Using the smart Audio-System. R X Press the F button. if the code 0000 appears in the smart Select Intellitext. Audio-System display, enter it and con- X firm it on the mobile phone A maximum of five mobile phones can be authorised. However, only one authorised Using a mobile phone mobile phone can be connected with Blue- ® Connecting a mobile phone tooth at a time. Useful information Loading and updating the phone book ® The Bluetooth -capable mobile phone must X Press the Ã button. be compatible with the smart Audio-System. X Select Settings > PB download. Overview of compatible mobile phones: X If necessary, accept the access confirma- http://www.smart.com/connect. tion on the mobile phone. ® To make a call, Bluetooth must be activated ® on the mobile phone and the smart Audio- If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth System. PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, the ® phone book and call lists will be transferred Once outside the Bluetooth reception range, after you connect. the connection is terminated automatically. To clearly identify a mobile phone, change Removing a mobile phone from the list the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). (de-authorising) X Press the Ã button. ® Activating Bluetooth on a mobile phone X Select Del. device. Authorised mobile phones are displayed. Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone X Select the mobile phone to be removed. (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- X tions). X Select YES. X Search for devices.

Z 110 Using a mobile phone

® After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth con- X Dial the selected phone number. nection to the mobile phone is no longer X Press the 9 button. established automatically. Dialling a number Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Press the Ã button.

® X Select Dial Number. X Activating Bluetooth on a mobile phone An input screen appears. Press the Ã button. X X Enter the number. X Select Sel. device. Press the 9 button. All authorised mobile phones are dis- X played. The currently connected mobile X Select ;. phone is indicated by a dot. X Select the desired mobile phone from the Using call lists to call contacts list. To call a contact in a call list, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be imported into the smart Audio-System. Setting the sound X Press the Ã button. Adjusting the call volume X Select Call lists. X Select Dialled, Received or Missed. Press the Ã button. >> Using the smart Audio-System. X X Select an entry from the list. X Select Settings > Volume > Call. Select the setting. X Calling the last number dialled

Switching the smart Audio-System ring- X Press and hold the Ã button until the tone on and off call is established. X Press the Ã button. Accepting a call X Select Settings > Ringtone. X Press the Ã button. X To switch on: select Car. X To switch off: select Phone. Rejecting a call

Adjusting the ringtone volume X Press and hold the Ã button until the call is rejected. X Press the Ã button. Select Settings > Volume > Ring. X Holding and continuing a call X Select the setting. X To place a call on hold: select Â. X To continue the call: press the 9 button. Telephone operation Transferring a call to the mobile phone Calling a contact from the phone book Select z. To call a contact in the telephone book, the X mobile phone telephone book first has to be X To transfer the call back to the smart imported into the smart Audio-System. Audio-System: press 9. X Press the Ã button. X Select Telephone book. X Select the contact. The details for the contact are displayed. Operating external data storage media 111

Entering numbers or characters during a Operating external data storage media call Useful information X Select #123. Enter numbers or characters. You can switch between the following media X sources, depending on the type of external data carrier connected: Ending a call RUSB 1 or iPod 1 X Press the 9 button. RUSB 2 or iPod 2 RAUX (external audio equipment) RBT Audio (with Bluetooth® connected Using voice control for the mobile device, such as a mobile phone) phone

Useful information Selecting external data carriers

The voice control of the connected mobile X Press the Õ button repeatedly until the phone can be used (see manufacturer's oper- desired media source appears in the dis- ating instructions). Not all voice control play. services are supported by the smart Audio- System.

Voice control must be activated in the set- ® tings menu of the mobile phone. Operating a USB device or iPod >> Using the smart Audio-System. Connecting a device Starting voice control for the mobile phone X Connect the device to the USB port. The device is activated automatically and X Connect the mobile phone with the smart the first track is played. Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Press the button on the steering Selecting a track wheel. A message appears in the display of the X In USB mode, press the 9 button. smart Audio-System and a tone sounds. Available tracks or folders are displayed. Voice control for the mobile phone is X Turn control B. active. X Press 9 to confirm. X Say a command. Rapid search Ending voice control for the mobile phone X Press the 9 button. X Press the button on the steering An entry field appears. wheel. X To enter characters, turn control B and or press the 9 button. X Press the 9 button. Voice control for the mobile phone is Skipping to the next or previous track ended. X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling.

Z 112 Operating external data storage media

Switching random track sequence on/off Bluetooth® device operation X Press the C button. Connecting a device

® Switching the repeat function on/off X Connect a Bluetooth audio device the same way you connect a mobile phone with X Press the number key. Bluetooth®.

Selecting a track from a category with an Skipping to the next or previous track iPod® connected X Press the D or C button briefly to X Press the 9 button. skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. X Select the category from a list. Different categories, such as playlists, artists or albums, can be selected, depend- Displaying metadata ing on the connected device. X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Displaying metadata

X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. >> Using the smart Audio-System.

Operating external audio equipment (AUX) Connecting a device

X Connect the device to the AUX jack. Use the Õ button to access the media on a connected AUX device.

Adjusting the volume of external audio equipment

X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select AUX In. X Select one of the following options for the volume: RLow RMedium RHigh Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 113

Operating and setting up the smart Controls on the smart Media-System Media-System Operating the smart Media-System Please note Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

: Previous station or track and fast rewind ; Mute = Next station or track and fast forward ? Switches to the home screen A Ü On/off button and volume control B Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console : Switches voice control system on and off, accepts and ends a phone call

; W Increases the volume >> Using the smart Media-System. = X Reduces the volume ? smart Media-System display

Voice control system The following functions are possible using the voice control system of the smart Media- System: Renter a destination for navigation Rmake a call : Port for external audio equipment (AUX) Rstart an application ; USB port = SD card slot Some devices, for example mobile phones or USB drives, connect with the smart Media- System via USB port ;. External devices with 5 V (1 A) can be charged on USB port ; when the ignition is switched on. 114 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Overview of home screen If the home page is set so as to display the eco score, you can switch to the eco score application by tapping on the area. When Android Auto™ or MirrorLink™ is active, another symbol is displayed on the home page. You can switch to the relevant smartphone screen application by tapping on the symbol.

Switching the smart Media-System on and off

To switch on automatically : Radio station, media track X Start the engine. ; Number of messages in the message memory To switch off automatically = Status of the mobile phone and field X Switch off the ignition and open the door. strength of the mobile phone network ? Outside temperature To switch on and off manually A Time X Press the Ü button. B Map To restart C Next navigation manoeuvre D Context menu X Press the Ü button. The smart Media-System shuts down and >> Using the smart Media-System. Distance to the destination and estima- E restarts. ted time of arrival F Favourites menu i The restart can take several minutes. G Main menu During the restart, the audio volume can- H Telephone menu, status of the mobile not be adjusted. phone and field strength of the mobile phone network Scrolling through a menu or list on the X To call up a function, tap on an area on the touchscreen home page or on a symbol: X Touch the touchscreen with your finger. R:: to switch to radio or media application X Swipe up, down, left or right. R;: to call up message memory The selection on the display will then move R=: to switch to telephone application in the respective direction. R?: to call up weather forecast for current location Selecting items on the touchscreen RA: to display time and temperature in full screen or call up time settings X Tap on a menu, an option or an application with one finger. RB: to switch to full screen navigation view The menu, the option or the application is RD: to change language, change home launched. page, remove SD card or switch off display RF: to view, call up or change Favourites RG: to call up main menu RH: to switch to telephone application i The home screen can be set to display the energy flow. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 115

Controlling media playback on the Adjusting the system settings touchscreen Adjusting the display X Swipe to the left. The next media item is played or dis- Setting the daytime brightness played, e.g. the next track or station. X Select System > Display . X Swipe to the right. Playback is restarted or the previous X Move the Daytime brightness control to media item is played or displayed, e.g. the the left or right. previous track. Setting the night time brightness Media playback can be controlled in the following playback modes: X Select System > Display. Move the Nighttime brightness control RRadio mode X to the left or right. RMusic and audio playback RImage playback Activating automatic switching between RVideo playback day and night mode X Select System > Display > Automatic day/ Calling up menus night mode.

X Select Menu on the home screen. Displaying day mode constantly Select one of the following submenus: Select System > Display . RMultimedia X Remove the tick for Automatic day/night Radio and media playback X mode and Force night mode. R

Navigation >> Using the smart Media-System. Navigation system Displaying night mode constantly R Telephone X Select System > Display > Force night Mobile phone functions mode RVehicle Reversing camera, eco score, energy Setting the system language flow and consumption details RServices X Select System > Language. A list of available languages is displayed. Apps and TomTom Services Select the desired language. RSystem X General systems settings i The language of the spoken navigation announcement can be selected independ- Confirming settings ently of the system language.

X Select Done. Changing the on-screen keyboard Settings are accepted. X Select System > Keyboards. Switching off the display X Select one of the following keyboard layouts: X Select home page > W > Switch off RLatin display. RGreek RCyrillic For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possible to choose between the ABCD, QWERTY, AZERTY and QWERTZ layouts. 116 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Selecting the home screen display For free and open-source software used RCopyright Different displays are available for the home page which display up-to-date information For text in the TomTom software used. about the applications in the smart Media- System. X Select System > Home page. Adjusting the audio settings A selection of home screen displays appears. Setting the volume Select the desired display. X X Select System > Sound > Volumes. X Select one of the following volume set- Resetting to factory settings tings: RMain volume Select System > Factory settings. X For the whole system X Confirm with Yes. All settings changed in the system return RHands-free to the default values. All destinations, For the hands-free system routes and favourites will be deleted. RRingtone Ring tone volume Setting the time manually RNavigation Volume for the whole navigation system X Select System > Clock > Set time. RComputer voice X Change the minutes and hours of the time shown. Volume of the computer-generated voice RApp events >> Using the smart Media-System. Activating automatic time adjustment Volume of events triggered by apps X Set the desired volume. X Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐ matic time adjustment. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- Setting the time format tem) X Select System > Clock > Time format. The speed-dependent volume adjustment X Choose one of the following time formats: function adapts the volume to the current R18:00 vehicle speed. R6:00 PM X Select System > Sound > Speed dependency. R6:00 X Move the Speed dependency control to the left or right. The higher the value, the more the volume Displaying status and information increases with the speed of the vehicle. X Select System > Status & Information. Volume adjustment is not set using the con- X Select one of the following information trol but automatically. options: RVersion information Adjusting surround sound (balance) Software and hardware of the Media- System X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > Balance > Manual. RGPS status Move the control to the desired position. Current GPS signal strength X X Confirm with Done. RNetwork status Signal strength of the data connection RLicences Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 117

Adjusting the bass and treble Creating and deleting favourites X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > Creating favourites Bass/Treble > Manual. X Use the control to adjust the bass and treble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass and treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > Bass/Treble > Neutral. Audio is played without increasing the bass or treble.

Activating and deactivating arkamys® : Preset bass boost (vehicles without JBL sound ; Navigation system) = Radio ? Telephone The arkamys® bass boost setting emphasises A Services the bass during playback. B Context menu X Select Multimedia > Settings > arkamys bass boost. Frequently used settings such as phone contacts and radio stations can be stored as Manual activation of arkamys® bass boost on

favourites. Six favourites can be stored for >> Using the smart Media-System. models with a JBL sound system is not pos- each of the following categories: sible. Activation functions automatically. RNavigation RRadio Setting the volume for warning tones RTelephone X Select System > Sound > Warnings. RServices X Move the control to the left or right. X Select Favourites on the home screen. X Select category. Enabling warning tones when the display X Select the next empty memory position. is switched off A list of possible favourites appears. X Select Favourites. X Select System > Sound > Warnings > Sound warning tones when display turned off. Deleting favourites

X Select Favourites on the home screen. X Select W > Remove a Favourite. X Perform one of the following steps: RSelect the favourite to be removed and press Delete to confirm. RTo delete all favourites, select Remove all Favourites. 118 Listening to the radio

Listening to the radio “Frequency” display mode (AM and FM radio) Switching on the radio

X Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes Useful information In radio mode there are three different display modes, in which various settings can be made: R“List” display mode (FM and digital radio) : Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) and R“Frequency” display mode (AM and FM preset group (FM) radio) ; Increases or decreases the frequency in R“Presets” display mode small increments = Station search, forwards or backwards “List” display mode (FM and digital radio) ? Context menu A Adjusts the frequency manually B Station currently playing

>> Using the smart Media-System. “Presets” display mode

: Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) and preset group (FM/DAB) ; Selects previous station = Selects next station ? Context menu : Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) A Selects “frequency” display mode and preset group (FM/DAB) B “List” display mode ; Stored station C Selects “Presets” display mode = Context menu D Station currently playing ? Station currently playing

Selecting a station “List” display mode

X Swipe up or down in the station list X Tap on the desired station. Calling up electric drive displays 119

“Frequency” display mode (AM and FM Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic) radio) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- X Slide control on the waveband left or right Traffic (Traffic programme).

Displaying the programme type (e.g. Starting a station search classical)

X Select C or D in the “frequency” dis- X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > play mode PTY (Programme type).

Switching to the corresponding FM sta- Storing a station tion when digital radio reception is poor Set the station. X X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > X Select W > Save as preset. Simulcast. Up to six stations can be stored for each waveband. Displaying information on certain categories (i-Announcement, digital radio only) Displaying radio text X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Radio text contains information such as cur- Announcement. rent track or latest news. X Select category of i-Announcements.

X Select W > Display radio text. >> Using the smart Media-System. Updating the station list

Displaying digital radio services X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Update radio list. X Select W > Digital radio services. X Select one of the following digital radio services: Calling up electric drive displays REPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Programme schedule for the station cur- Calling up the energy flow display rently playing Select Menu > Vehicle > electric drive > RIntellitext X Energy flow. Programme information and programme schedule for the station currently play- The Energy flow display shows the flow of ing energy in the vehicle. RSlide show The colour of the energy flow indicates the Displays images to accompany the cur- following: rent broadcast RGreen colouring: energy is being recuperated ROrange colouring: the drive is consuming Other radio settings energy RYellow colouring and an illustration of the Searching for alternative frequencies consumers: electrical consumers are con- with the best possible reception quality suming energy RGrey colouring: no energy is being recu- X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > AF perated or consumed (Alternative frequency). 120 Using a mobile phone

Calling up the detailed consumption vehicle, always connect them to the low- display reflection exterior aerial. Select Menu > Vehicle > electric drive > X Bluetooth® must be enabled both on the Consumption details. mobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys- The Consumption details display shows the tem. energy consumption of the drive and electrical consumers as well as the energy recu- Enabling and disabling Bluetooth® perated during the previous 15 minutes. The display also shows the total consumption of The mobile phone must be compatible with the drive and electrical consumers as well as the smart Media-System. the total amount of energy recuperated dur- Overview of compatible mobile phones: ing the current journey. https://www.smart.com/connect. The Consumption details display is reset Select Settings > Enable Bluetooth. each time the engine is switched on. X The setting is marked. Bluetooth® is enabled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Authorising a mobile phone Please note Authorising a mobile phone for the first time WARNING G Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart

>> Using the smart Media-System. The electromagnetic radiation from two- Media-System. way radios can interfere with the vehicle X Select the Telephone menu. electronics if they are manipulated or ret- Confirm the display message with Yes. rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise X X Enter the security code on the mobile the operating safety of the vehicle. There is phone or accept access confirmation (see a risk of an accident. manufacturer's operating instructions). You should have all work on electrical and The message Bluetooth is enabled is electronic components carried out at a shown. qualified specialist workshop. Authorising another mobile phone ® WARNING Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart G Media-System. If you operate two-way radios incorrectly Select Settings > Manage devices. in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi- X The list of visible mobile phones is dis- ation can interfere with the vehicle elec- played. tronics, for example if: X Select a mobile phone from the list. Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an X Enter the security code on the mobile exterior aerial phone or accept access confirmation (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun- The Bluetooth® connection is established. ted or is not low-reflection The Bluetooth® connection will be estab- This could jeopardise the operating safety lished automatically in future. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating two-way radios in the Using a mobile phone 121

Downloading telephone data automati- Calling a contact from the phone book cally X Select Telephone book. X Select Settings > Download telephone X Select the contact. data automatically . X Select the contact's telephone number. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- If the phone book contains multiple contacts, tion on the mobile phone. they can be called up using a Search. During connection, up to 1,000 contacts are automatically transferred to the smart Media-System. Dialling a number

X Select Dial number. Connecting another authorised mobile X Enter a number on the keypad. phone X Select Call. X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select a mobile phone. Calling a contact from the call log The current Bluetooth® connection is ter- Select Call logs. minated. The desired mobile phone is con- X nected to the smart Media-System instead. X Select an entry from the list. The call log can be sorted according to calls Removing a mobile phone from the list made, calls received and missed calls using the corresponding receiver icon. X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Delete device(s). Accepting and rejecting an incoming call X Select a mobile phone. If a call is incoming, the following informa- >> Using the smart Media-System. X Select Delete. tion will appear on the display: Rname of caller, if already in the phone book ® Terminating a Bluetooth connection Rnumber of caller, if name of caller not already in the phone book X Select Settings > Manage devices. RPrivate number, if the caller has the "Hide X Select W > Disconnect all devices. caller ID" function switched on X Select a mobile phone. X To accept the call, select Accept. ® If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth X To reject the call, select Reject. receiver range, the connection is automati- The call will be forwarded to voicemail. cally terminated. Holding and continuing a call

Telephone operation X Select W > Put on hold. To continue the call, select Continue. Useful information X The following conditions must be fulfilled in Transferring a call to the mobile phone order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call: Ra valid and operational SIM card is inser- X Select W > Mobile phone. ted in the mobile phone Ra mobile phone network is available Ending a call

X Select End call.

Z 122 Using a mobile phone

Using the smartphone screen applica- MirrorLink™ is available for mobile phones tion with the "Android" operating system. Further information: http://www.smart.com/ Selecting settings for the smartphone connect. screen To use MirrorLink™, observe the following requirements: Selecting the preferred smartphone screen Rthe mobile phone must support Mirror- application Link™ version 1.1 and above If mobile phones support Android Auto™ as Rthe mobile phone is switched on well as MirrorLink™, the preferred applica- Ra MirrorLink™ certified app must be tion can be selected when a mobile phone is installed on the mobile phone connected. Rthe GPS connection must be activated on X Select System > Smartphone Screen > the mobile phone Smartphone Screen application pref‐ Rthe time is set on the smart Media-System erence. X Select Android Auto™ or MirrorLink™. Setting up a connection X Activate MirrorLink™ on your mobile Selecting settings to start Android Auto™ phone (see the manufacturer's operating and MirrorLink™ instructions). X Select System > Smartphone Screen > X Connect a mobile phone with a connecting Android Auto™ Settings. cable to the USB socket in the centre con- or sole. Select System > Smartphone Screen > Mir‐ X Select Yes. X Apps which have been certified for Mir- >> Using the smart Media-System. rorLink Settings. rorLink™ will be shown in the smart X Select one of the following settings: Media-System display. RAsk me at each launch If the smartphone has been connected Calling up MirrorLink™ apps with the smart Media-System, you will X be asked whether the preferred smart- Tap on the home page of the smart phone screen application should be Media-System. started. MirrorLink™ starts in the smart Media- System display. RYes X Select the desired app. If the smartphone has been connected The display switches to full screen mode. with the smart Media-System, the preferred smartphone screen application X To leave full screen display: press and hold will be started automatically. the ò button on the smart Media-Sys- RNo tem until the lower bar is shown. If the smartphone has been connected X To exit the display: select 2. with the smart Media-System, a smartphone screen application will not be MirrorLink™ audio playback started. If your mobile phone supports this function, you can control audio playback via the but- Using MirrorLink™ tons on the smart Media-System. X To select the previous track: press the 9 Useful information button. MirrorLink® is standard for the connection X To rewind: press and hold the 9 button. between the smart Media-System and a X To select the next track: press the : mobile phone. With MirrorLink®, the content button. of the display on your mobile phone can be displayed in the smart Media-System. Using a mobile phone 123

X To fast forward: press and hold the : related to the vehicle identification number button. (VIN) and is deleted if the smart Media-Sys- tem is reset. X To mute: press the 8 button. The following driving status data is trans- Disconnecting the MirrorLink™ connection mitted: X Select q > Disconnect. Rgear position engaged Rinstrument cluster day/night mode Using Android Auto™ This data is transmitted in order to adapt the content displayed to the driving situation. Useful information GPS data such as coordinates, speed and Android Auto™ is an application for the con- compass direction is transmitted. This data nection between the smart Media-System is transmitted only when navigation is and a mobile phone. Certain mobile phone active in order to improve navigation (e.g. functions and apps can be controlled via the when driving through a tunnel). smart Media-System with Android Auto™. Setting up a connection Functions such as telephony, navigation and the audio playback of Android Auto™ are dis- X Activate Android Auto™ on the mobile played on the home page of the smart Media- phone (see manufacturer's operating System. instructions). Android Auto™ is available for mobile tele- X Connect a mobile phone with a connecting phones with the Android operating system. cable to the USB socket in the centre console. Further information: http://www.smart.com/ connect. X Select Yes. Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- In order to use Android Auto™, the following System display. >> Using the smart Media-System. conditions must be met: Rthe mobile phone supports Android Auto™ Calling up Android Auto™ starting from Android™ 5.0 X Tap on the home page of the smart Rthe mobile phone is switched on Media-System. Rthe mobile phone has an Internet connec- Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- tion System display. Rthe Android Auto™ app is installed on the mobile phone Activating Android Auto™ voice-operated control Transmitted vehicle data when using Android Auto™ When Android Auto™ is activated, the system can be operated with voice control. When using Android Auto™, specific vehicle data is transmitted to the mobile phone. This X Press and hold the button on the mul- makes it possible to use selected mobile tifunction steering wheel for approx- phone services efficiently. The mobile phone imately three seconds. does not have active access to vehicle data. A tone sounds. The following system information is transmitted: Disconnecting Android Auto™ Rsmart media system software status X Disconnect the USB connection between the mobile phone and the smart Media- Rsystem ID (anonymous) System. This data is transmitted in order to optimise communication between the vehicle and mobile phone. A random vehicle code is generated for this purpose and in order to assign multiple vehicles to the mobile phone. This code is not

Z 124 Connecting and operating external data storage media

Using voice control for the mobile X Select Phone book > W > Update tele‐ phone phone data.

Useful information Updating the call log The voice control of the connected mobile X Select Call logs > W > Update tele‐ phone can be used (see manufacturer's oper- phone data. ating instructions). Not all voice control services are supported by the smart Media- System. Adding a contact to favourites The requirement for voice control of the Select Telephone > Phone book. mobile phone is that Android Auto™ or Mir- X rorLink™ are not active. X Select a contact from the list. X Select W > Add to favourites. Activating voice control for the mobile X Dial a phone number. phone

X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Connecting and operating external Media-System via Bluetooth®. data storage media X Press and hold the button on the steering wheel. Useful information The symbol appears in the display. The following external data storage media Voice control for the mobile phone is can be connected: active. RUSB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with max. >> Using the smart Media-System. 64 GB) or iPod™ RSD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB) Further settings RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- Setting the volume tion) RBluetooth® devices such as mobile phones X Select Settings > Volumes. The following formats are supported: X Set the volume of the hands-free system and the ringtone. RMP3 files RWMA files RACC formats Activating voicemail (.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R, .MP4 and .3GP) X Select Voicemail. ROGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA) X Enter the voicemail number on the keypad. RPCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM) X Select Done. Voicemail is activated and the voicemail A data storage medium may contain no more number is dialled. than eight directory levels. The smart Media-System only recognises the Configuring voicemail first partition of a data storage medium. The partition must be formatted as FAT or FAT32. X Select Settings > Voice mail configura‐ tion.

Updating the phone book A Bluetooth® connection must be present. Connecting and operating external data storage media 125

Connecting external data storage D Selects a new track based on categories, media e.g. album, genre, folder E Resumes playback at any point in the Connecting a USB memory stick track Insert a USB memory stick in the port on X ® the centre console. Controlling playback from a Bluetooth Playback starts automatically. device

Connecting an SD card

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the centre console. Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

® X Authorise and connect a Bluetooth device, such as a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. : Selects a new track ; Selects the previous track Operating external data storage media = Stops playback ? Selects the next track

Selecting connected external data stor- A Displays the playlist >> Using the smart Media-System. age media B Calls up the context menu

X Select Menu > Multimedia > Media. Selecting a different device X Select connected medium. X Select W > Change source. Controlling playback from a USB memory stick or SD card Connecting another authorised Blue- tooth® device

X Select W > Find new device.

Enabling and disabling random playback

X To enable: select W > Enable random playback. X To disable: select W > Disable random playback.

: Selects the previous track Displaying details of tracks on a USB memory stick or SD card ; Selects the next track = Stops and continues playback X Select W > Track details. ? Switches track repeat on A Switches random playback on B Calls up the context menu C Displays the playlist

Z 126 Viewing images

Selecting a track from current playlist Switching between images

X Select New selection > Folders. X Swipe left or right. The current playlist is displayed. X Select Find. Specifying a new selection of images A keyboard is shown. New selection X Enter the name or part of the name of the X Select . track you are looking for.

Selecting a track from categories Setting image playback

X Select New selection. Switching from normal to thumbnail view X Select category for playback. X Select Thumbnails.

Switching album cover display on and off Switching from thumbnail to normal view The album cover must be saved in the audio Select an image. file. X X Select Multimedia > Settings > Media > Display album cover. Displaying in full screen mode

X Select W > Full screen.

Viewing images Activating the controls in full screen

>> Using the smart Media-System. Useful information mode Images that have been saved to an SD card or X Tap the touchscreen. USB memory stick can be viewed in the smart Media-System. Switching from full screen mode to nor- The following file formats can be displayed: mal view R.JPG X Select W > Normal view. R.GIF R.PNG Enlarging the image R.BMP X Select W > Enlarge.

Image playback Showing images as a slide show

Starting image playback X Select W > Slide show.

X Insert SD card or USB memory stick into the corresponding port. Setting the display duration X Select Multimedia > Images. X Select W > Image settings > Slide X Select media source USB or SD. show delay. X Select folder. X Set the desired time using the controls. X Select image. Setting default view for image playback

X Select W > Image settings > Default view. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Using the navigation system 127

Video playback Using the navigation system Video playback Starting the navigation system Starting video playback Please note Insert SD card or connect USB stick. X G WARNING X Select Multimedia > Video. If you operate information and communi- X Select USB or SD. cation equipment integrated in the vehicle X Select folder or video. when driving, you could be distracted from All videos in a folder are played one after the traffic situation. This could also cause the other. you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a i The size of the video file may have an risk of an accident. impact on the performance of the system. Only operate this equipment when the Therefore, only playback videos with a traffic situation permits. If you cannot be length of up to 5 minutes. sure of this, stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions and Selecting the next or previous video operate the equipment with the vehicle X Select D or C. stationary.

The navigation system does not provide Stops and continues playback information on stop signs, right of way signs, X Select Ë. traffic regulations or road safety regula-

tions. >> Using the smart Media-System. Traffic regulations always take priority over Playing a new video the navigation system's driving recommendations. X Select New selection. Select a new video Observe the legal stipulations and traffic X regulations of the country you are driving in when in navigation mode.

Setting the video view Starting the navigation system

Playing videos in full screen mode X Select Menu > Navigation. The following functions can be carried out: X Select Full screen. Rsearching for a destination Rplanning a route Setting the default view for video play- Rdisplaying a map back Rcalling up TomTom Services X Select W > Video settings. Rchanging navigation settings X Select Normal view or Full screen. Installing map data

G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Z 128 Using the navigation system

Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil- X Select the destination from the list. dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med- X Select the street. ical attention immediately. X Select the house number. X Confirm with Done. ! To prevent damage to data, only use the SD card provided for the data in the Media- System or for updating map and systems Searching for a car park near the desti- files. nation address

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in This function can be called up when entering the centre console. the destination. X Switch on the device. X Select W > Nearby car park. The map data is imported to the navigation A list of car parks near the current desti- system. nation appears.

Removing an SD card Displaying information about the destination address X Select Menu > System > Remove SD card. X Confirm the display message with Yes. This function can be called up when entering the destination. X Press the SD card. X Remove the SD card from the slot. X Select W > Show info.

Updating map data Entering a destination using the map

>> Using the smart Media-System. Regular updates will be offered for the map A location on the map can be selected as the data. The first update can be downloaded for destination. free in the web portal within 90 days of vehi- X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point cle activation. This requires registration at on map. http://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further infor- Align the map view with the destination. mation is available from any smart centre. X X Tap the destination point on the display. X Remove SD card from the vehicle and insert The symbol selected is highlighted in blue. into a computer. X Tap on the symbol to confirm. X Install update software on the computer. Run the map update assistant. X Entering a destination using the voice i As well as updates, the latest software for control system the Media-System can be downloaded and Premium Voices by TomTom can be pur- X Press the button on the multifunction chased. steering wheel. A tone sounds. X Say the command "Enter address". Entering and managing destinations X When prompted by the voice control system, say the destination address, includ- Entering a destination by address ing street name, house number and city. Say the voice command "Yes" or, if several X When using the navigation system for the X first time, enter country. possible destinations are displayed, say the number. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Address. X If desired, change the country using the flag symbol. X Enter town or postcode. Using the navigation system 129

Selecting a destination from the list of RNear home last destinations RIn a city X Select the location for the charging station X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Recent search. destinations. A list of the corresponding charging sta- X Select destination. tions appears. There is an automatic check whether a charging point is free on these Entering a destination using geo-coor- charging stations. The check may take several minutes. When the check is fin- dinates ished, a message appears. If a charging X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐ station has a charging point which is not tude Longitude. being used, it will be marked green. If no Enter the longitude and latitude. charging point is free, or no information is X available, the charging station is marked grey. Charging stations from the map data Setting home location which cannot be checked, are not marked. A maximum of 24 charging stations can be X Select Navigation > Settings > Set home checked. address. i Five minutes after the check, the marking X Enter a home address. automatically changes from green to grey.

X Select a charging station. Setting home as a destination

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home. Entering a point of interest

POIs such as museums, restaurants or car >> Using the smart Media-System. Selecting a saved location as destination parks near a location are displayed on the map. At least one destination must be stored for this function. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point of interest. Select Navigation > Drive to... > Saved X The following list of surrounding areas locations. appears. A POI can be searched for in these X Select destination. areas: RNear my location Managing saved locations RAlong the route RNear destination X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage saved locations. RNear home RIn a city Entering a charging station as a desti- X Select surrounding area for the search for a POI. nation The following list of categories for POIs X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Charg‐ appears: ing stations. RList of categories for POIs: e.g. charging The following list of locations appears in station or restaurant which a charging station can be searched RPOI name search for: RPOI search within a category RNear my location X Select category for the search. RAlong the route X Select a POI. RNear destination i If the charging station category is selected, only charging stations from the map data are searched. Charging stations that

Z 130 Using the navigation system

can be checked for charging point availa- X Select Navigation > Drive to... > TomTom bility are not taken into account. Places. A list of search criteria appears which can Managing POIs be used to search for a POI. X Select the search criteria. Adding a POI category X Enter a search term. X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage If a large number of search results are POIs > Add POI category. available, 20 additional search results can be downloaded. X Enter the name and symbol for the new POI category.

Deleting a POI category Changing the route X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI category. Useful information X Select the POI category to be deleted. Once the destination has been selected, the navigation system calculates the route to the Adding POIs destination. The following options are available for adjusting route guidance: X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI. Rcalculate alternative routes If no POI categories have been defined yet, Radjust routes calculated by the navigation a prompt appears to enter a POI category. system X Select the category for the POI. Rplan routes in advance and travel via spe- X Enter your POI. cific way points

>> Using the smart Media-System. Radjust settings for calculating routes Deleting POIs Once the route is calculated, a route sum- X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage mary is shown. By default, the quickest route POIs > Delete POI. will be calculated for route planning, taking X Select POI category. into account IQ Routes™. Traffic information is taken into account when calculating the X Select the POI to be deleted. route. Editing POIs Depending on the remaining range, sections of the route receive the following colours: X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Edit POI. Rgreen: remaining range is expected to be sufficient for the route. X Select POI category. Rorange: this route may or may not be able X Customise the POI properties. to be completed depending on the driving Setting alerts for a nearby POI style and the influence of external factors. Rred: remaining range is not expected to be X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Warning when near POI. sufficient for the route. Select POI category. The "route overview" function allows you to X set whether the summary of a calculated X Set the distance at which the message route is automatically faded out from the should appear. display after ten seconds. X Set the type of alert issued. If the route is not confirmed with Done, the view switches after approximately ten sec- Entering a destination via the TomTom onds automatically to the map view. LIVE service "TomTom Places" POIs from the "TomTom Places" online data- base are available using the "TomTom Pla- ces" function. Using the navigation system 131

Displaying a planned route Route guidance via way point The route can be adjusted by entering up to Calculating the route four way points. Enter a destination. X X Select Navigation > Change route > X Select Done. Travel via. The route is displayed. If the remaining If a way point has already been entered, a range is not expected to be sufficient to list of the saved way points will be dis- reach the destination, a prompt will played. appear asking whether a charging station X Select Add. should be added to the route. X Select a new way point from Address, Displaying the route details Recent destinations, Saved locations, TomTom Places or POI. X Select W > Route details. The new way point is added. X Select one of the following functions: RDisplay instructions Avoiding road blocks An overview of the route with directions The route can be changed if a section of road appears. along the route is blocked or there is a traffic RDisplay a map of the route jam. The route appears on a map. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid RDisplay the destination roadblock. The destination for the route appears. X Select the length of the route that needs to be avoided. By pressing W, it is possible to search for a car park near the destination or add

the location to the saved locations. Avoiding specific roads >> Using the smart Media-System. The route is calculated to avoid specific RShow traffic on route roads. Traffic disruptions along the route are shown. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid part of route. RSummary A list of the roads on the route is displayed. A summary of the route details appears. X Select the road you wish to avoid. Saving a planned route Taking traffic disruptions into account Select W > Save Itinerary . The route is recalculated based on current X traffic information Traffic information is not available in all Changing the route countries and regions. Cancelling the route X Select Navigation > Change route > Mini‐ mise delays. X Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐ An overview of the traffic disruptions cel route. along the route will be shown. When a new destination is entered, route X Select the traffic disruption you wish to guidance can be resumed again. avoid. Calculating an alternative route Planning a route in advance X Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐ culate alternative. A new route is calculated and displayed Adding a route that takes you on different roads. X Select Navigation > Routes. X Select the alternative route or a previous X Select Add. one. X Select the starting point of the route.

Z 132 Using the navigation system

X Enter the route destination. Selecting the setting for carpool lanes X Enter at least one way point for the route. Carpool lanes are lanes which can only be X Enter the route name. used by vehicles with at least two occupants. X Confirm with Done. X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Carpool lane settings. Starting navigation using a saved route X Select one of the following settings: X Select Navigation > Routes. RAsk for carpool lanes on my route X Select the desired route. RAlways avoid carpool lanes. X Select W > Go. RNever avoid carpool lanes

Setting route planning Using information during route guid- Selecting the route type ance X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Route types. Useful information X Select one of the following settings: Navigation announcements provide guid- RAsk for every route ance during the journey without distracting RAlways plan the fastest route you from traffic conditions. In addition, the RAlways plan eco routes display shows information about the route. RAlways avoid motorways Switching navigation announcements on RAlways plan the shortest route and off

>> Using the smart Media-System. Selecting the setting for toll roads X Tap on the area of the next navigation X Select Navigation > Settings > Route manoeuvre during route guidance. planning > Toll roads. X Select Turn on voice guidance or Turn X Select one of the following settings: off voice guidance. RAsk for toll roads on route Information such as traffic reports and RAlways avoid toll roads warnings will be played even if the naviga- RDo not avoid toll roads tion announcements have been deactivated. During route guidance, traffic information Selecting the setting for ferry connections can be shown for the route ahead. The following traffic information can be received: X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Ferry connections. RTraffic announcements (RDS/TMC) X Select one of the following settings: RHD Traffic (a TomTom Live service) RAsk for ferries on my route i HD Traffic Information takes precedence. RAlways avoid ferries Live services are not available in all coun- RDo not avoid ferries tries and regions. Further information: i Route planning treats the Eurotunnel as http://tomtom.com/services a ferry connection. Selecting the setting for unpaved roads X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Unpaved roads. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for unpaved roads on my route RAlways avoid unpaved roads Using the navigation system 133

Tracking navigation on the display the exit. Lane Keeping Assist is not available for all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

: Zoom in and out of the map view : Overall delay on route ; Maximum permitted speed ; Traffic disruption (packed snow) = Name of the next main road or information about the next street sign = Traffic disruption (rain) Traffic disruption (traffic jam) ? Traffic information ? Current location and distance to next A Route information A traffic disruption Warning for remaining range to destination During route guidance, traffic information is B Compass and symbol for two or three- shown for the route ahead. When there are a dimensional map display number of traffic disruptions in quick suc- cession, only the very next disruption on the C Context menu route will be displayed. >> Using the smart Media-System. D Next navigation manoeuvre with distance and symbol for volume adjustment Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. E Information about current radio or audio equipment Colour Meaning X Tap on an area or on a symbol in the map Grey Unknown or unexplained situa- display: tion RMap: to switch to the overview map Orange Slow-moving traffic R:: to zoom in and out of the map view R?: to show traffic reports on the route Red Traffic jam RA: to display the route details Dark Standstill or road blocked RB: to switch between two or three-dimen- red sional map display RC: to open the context menu Calling up more detailed information RD: to repeat the navigation instruction, about the traffic problems change the volume of navigation announcements or switch off X Tap on the display for traffic information RE: to switch to the corresponding radio, during route guidance. multimedia or telephone menu The navigation system zooms in on the map Scrolling through the traffic reports view as the vehicle approaches a junction. This makes it possible to follow turning X Tap on the message on the touchscreen and manoeuvres more accurately. swipe left or right. Shortly before navigating a motorway junction or exit, the display will show a three- dimensional representation of the lanes and

Z 134 Using the navigation system

Displaying the overview map RTraffic information RNames Useful information RPoints of interest (POIs) With the "View map" function, the display RSatellite images shows a slidable, two-dimensional overview RCoordinates map. The map shows your current position, as well as a number of other elements, such as Favourites. Using TomTom Services with the navigation system Displaying a map Useful information X Select Navigation > View map. A map of the surrounding area will be In the TomTom Services menu, traffic infor- shown. mation and other TomTom-LIVE services can X To search: select W > Search. be called up and managed. TomTom Live Services are available for a subscription fee. The following TomTom Controlling the map view Services come pre-installed and, following activation, can be used free of charge for a Moving the map period of three years: Tap on the centre of the touchscreen. X RHD Traffic X Swipe in the desired direction. The map will then move in the respective direction. RRadar cameras (not available in all countries) RWeather >> Using the smart Media-System. Zooming in on the map RTomTom Places X Place two fingers slightly apart in the middle of the touchscreen. More information on services http://www.tomtom.com/services. X Move your fingers away from each other. More information on availability in specific Reducing the scale of the map countries: http://smart.com/connect TomTom Services can also be called up and X Place two fingers at a greater distance apart on the screen. Do not place your fin- managed in the Services menu. In the main gers at the very top area or very bottom menu, select Services > TomTom Services. area of the display. i If you have subscribed to the "TomTom X Pull your fingers towards each other. Traffic" service and this is available, the "Traffic info" menu will be called "TomTom Displaying the reachability map Traffic". If no route is planned, a reachability map can Activating TomTom Services be displayed in order to roughly gauge the range with the current charge status. TomTom Services must be activated in the smart Media-System before using them for X Select Navigation > View map. the first time. If TomTom Services are not yet X Select W > View reachability map. activated, a corresponding button will be displayed in the main menu and in the Serv‐ Showing and hiding additional informa- ices menu. tion on the map

X Select Navigation > View map. X Select W > Change map information. X Select one of the following information options: Using the navigation system 135

To activate TomTom Services for the first Displaying traffic disruptions on the time, observe the following requirements: overview map Ran SD card with map data is inserted into the SD card slot X Select W > View map during route guidance. Ra valid vehicle position is available on the Traffic disruptions are displayed as sym- map bols on the overview map. Large area traf- Ra mobile phone network is available fic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow X Select Services > Activate My Services. are displayed with several symbols. To view detailed information, tap on a traf- X Confirm the display message with Yes. X After a short while, TomTom Services are fic disruption symbol. available. The following symbols are used: X Select Services > TomTom Services. The TomTom Services installed on the Symbol Meaning device are displayed. Traffic jam X Select the desired TomTom service. A display message appears. TomTom Serv- Road blocked ices are activated. Traffic disruption Starting TomTom Services Construction site X Select Navigation > TomTom Services.

Checking subscription status for Tom- One or more lanes blocked Tom Services >> Using the smart Media-System. Accident X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > My Services. Traffic disruption avoided The services available on the device and using the traffic information their subscription status will be shown. Fog

Displaying traffic information along the Wind route

X Tap on the area of traffic information dur- Snow ing route guidance. X Swipe left or right to switch between traf- Black ice fic information. Rain Adjusting the route according to traffic disruptions i Large area traffic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow are displayed on the X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Minimise delays. overview map with several symbols. A faster route that had been previously rejected or route which may not have been Viewing traffic information for the route taken into account due to the Never to work change my route setting for the traffic information is selected. X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. for route to work. X Select one of the following settings:

Z 136 Using the navigation system

RHome to work RRead traffic info. aloud when nav‐ RWork to home igating RChange the home to work route RRead foreign street names aloud RRead street numbers aloud Changing the settings for traffic infor- RRead street names aloud mation RRead weather information aloud RRead POI warnings aloud Select Navigation > TomTom Services > X RRead aloud warnings Traffic > Traffic info. settings. RRead signposts aloud X Select one of the following settings: RAlways change to this route If a faster route has been calculated due Changing the map to a traffic report, the navigation system X Select Navigation > Settings > Change automatically changes the route. map. RRequest confirmation for route X Select the desired map. If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system will ask which route should be used. Changing the map colours RNever change my route X Select Navigation > Settings > Change The navigation system will not change map colours. the route, even if a traffic announcement X Press , or . to select the desired has been made. display.

>> Using the smart Media-System. Changing the settings for electric drive Setting the navigation system X Select Navigation > Settings > electric Setting the voice drive settings. The following functions can be called up: The voice which is used for navigation commands can be changed. It is possible to Rdeactivating or activating the battery choose between computer-generated voices warning or voices recorded by professionals. For voi- When the charge status of the high- ces that have been recorded by professio- voltage battery has reached 20% and the nals, only basic navigation commands will battery warning is activated, a display be spoken. message appears. Select System > Sound > Voice. Rshowing or hiding charging stations on X the map X Select voice for playback. Rmanaging charging stations X To listen to the voice, select Test. Rselecting the charging cable The settings for both the type of charging Setting the voice output and charging cable are used by the naviga- The read-aloud function is only available in tion system to refine the selection of avail- a computer-generated voice. able charging stations. During navigation, the following options can be selected via the X Select System > Sound > Voice output W context menu: settings. RSearch for type of charging X Select one of the following settings: RSearch for electricity provider RRead early warning instructions aloud RDisplay all charging stations A display message appears if there is some RRead motorway lane instructions aloud incompatibility between the defined settings and a selected charging station. Managing apps 137

Setting safety warnings The smart Media-System uses a mobile phone connection for data connection. Please X Select System > Safety warnings. take note of the following information when X To select the desired settings: using data services: RSuggest driving breaks RThe mobile connectivity and built-in SIM RWarn when driving near schools card for this vehicle can only be used for RWarn when driving faster than data services. These are offered by certain allowed third parties as well as Daimler AG. Usage occurs via the smart Media-System in the RWarn when driving faster than a set speed vehicle. The use of data services requires the conclusion of separate agreements X Select Resume. between the vehicle user and the respec- X Select a warning tone for the respective tive provider. Voice service usage is not safety warning. permitted. As such, the SIM card must be For the "Warn when driving faster than a set permanently installed as factory equip- speed" function, the speed above which the ment. warning tone should sound must be entered. RThe mobile communications connectivity and the SIM card may only be used respon- Setting the units of measurement for dis- sibly in accordance with the applicable laws and other legal requirements of the tance corresponding countries. Insofar as this is All units of measurement for distance in the within the power of the vehicle user. navigation system can be changed. The units RUpgrading, reproduction, reverse assem- of measurement for distance of other dis- bly and disassembly of the SIM card are plays are not changed, such as distance dis- not permitted. Statutory authority plays for the eco score or the on-board com- remains unaffected. >> Using the smart Media-System. puter. Failure to follow the above instructions, can X Select System > Set units > Distance in some cases lead to temporary or perma- units. nent deactivation of the mobile connection Select one of the following settings: and the SIM card. This depends on the X severity of non-compliance. The measures RKilometres described here, contribute in particular RMiles towards protecting the Daimler AG and its contractual partners from negative legal Setting the units for GPS coordinates consequences arising from non-compliance. The availability of mobile connectivity in X Select System > Set units > GPS co-ordi‐ individual countries depends on the exis- nate display. tence of corresponding mobile service agree- Select one of the following settings: ments with local mobile network providers. X Availability can therefore change from time RDegrees (d°) to time. The maximum period of validity for RDegrees, Minutes (d° m.m') the mobile connectivity is 15 years from the RDegrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m\' s time of installation in the vehicle. \'')

Installing Apps Managing apps If available, apps may be used on the Smart Media-System. This requires registration at Useful information http://tomtom.com/forsmart. If available, apps may be installed and man- X Remove SD card from the vehicle and insert aged on the smart Media-System. Apps and into a computer. the use of TomTom services can be called up and managed in the Services menu. Further information: http://tomtom.com/ forsmart.

Z 138 Managing apps

Displaying and calling up apps Displaying apps

X Select Services > Settings > Applica‐ tions manager. The Apps installed on the SD card are shown in the smart Media-System.

Calling up apps

X Select Services. X Select the desired app.

Calling up the connectivity manager The connectivity manager allows you to manage the devices connected to the smart Media-System. X Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐ ity manager.

>> Using the smart Media-System. Managing data sharing Enabling or disabling data sharing If data sharing has not been enabled before- hand, a corresponding message is shown when the smart Media-System is started up. Data sharing can be enabled or disabled at any time. X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ ing. X Select one of the following settings: RYes Enable data sharing RNo Disable data sharing.

Displaying additional information

X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing > About.

Displaying text in another language

X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing > Language. Using smart "ready to" services 139

Online access to the vehicle A valid e-mail address is necessary for registration and the terms of use must be accepted. G WARNING RThe vehicle must be linked with a personal If you operate information and communi- "smart control" account at a smart centre. cation equipment integrated in the vehicle Verification and presentation of the vehi- when driving, you could be distracted from cle registration document are required to the traffic situation. This could also cause link the vehicle. The vehicle identification you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a number (VIN) is also required. risk of an accident. RThe desired functions must be activated after linking the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the For activation, the "smart control" terms of traffic situation permits. If you cannot be use for both the remote query and remote sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- configuration must be accepted via a por- tion to road and traffic conditions and tal. The portal address is supplied by the operate the equipment with the vehicle smart centre. stationary. RThe vehicle must be connected to the Internet. G WARNING Connection is made possible via the mobile communications module integrated in the If you use mobile information systems and vehicle. communications devices while driving, Once these requirements are fulfilled, the you will be distracted from traffic condi- following functions, for example, may be tions. You could then lose control of the used: vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. RCalling up the current locking status of the Only operate these devices when the vehi- vehicle. cle is stationary. RCalling up information on the distance before the next recommended service or if >> Using online offerings. Observe the legal requirements for the coun- a service is already due. try in which you are currently driving. RCalling up the current vehicle position in You can use "smart control" to access remote the range of approx. 1.5 km around the query and to configure your vehicle vehicle. remotely. It can be accessed from computers During the charging process, additional dis- and smartphones. The Internet address is plays can be called up such as the predicted available from any smart centre. It is also time until charging is completed or the possible to call up "smart control" via the charging capacity. smart website. If there is a delay in the synchronisation of Access to "smart control" is free of charge for data via the mobile phone network, the dis- the first three years commencing from hand- plays in the vehicle and at "smart control" over of the new vehicle, subject to the avail- may temporarily differ from each other. ability of the service. Thereafter you can continue to subscribe to use the "smart con- Further information on "smart control" is trol" service. available at any smart centre. The availability and features of "smart control" may vary from country to country. Requirements for the use of "smart control": Using smart "ready to" services RYou must register on the "smart control" Useful information website. smart "ready to" services are only available in certain countries. The functions are enabled via a communication module and the smart "ready to" app.

Z 140 Using smart "ready to" services

Information as well as the Internet addresses for the smart "ready to" services are available at any smart centre. i If you are already using a smart "ready to" service, additional services can be activated with your user details in the usual web portal or via the app. The communication module and activation are required in order to use the smart "ready to" services: RRegister on the "ready to" web portal. A valid e-mail address and the vehicle identification number (VIN) are necessary for registration, and the conditions of use must be accepted. RInstall the "ready to" app on your smartphone and create a user account.

Using the Key Card Holder >> Using online offerings.

Key Card Holder : is fitted in the glove compartment and is intended for the storage and inventory of the vehicle key and up to two cards (e.g. fuel card, parking card or car wash card). The inventory is available within certain smart "ready to" services. For an inventory, the key and/or the cards must be equipped with an RFID tag. Stowing small objects 141

Stowing small objects ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The Please note drinks could otherwise spill.

G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in Using the compartments an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occupants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situations.

RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- X To stow objects, use the following com- trude over the top of stowage compart- partments: ments or stowage nets. R: Stowage compartments in the doors RAll closable stowage compartments R; Cup holder in the front centre console should be closed before beginning your R= Glove compartment journey. R? Stowage net in the front-passenger footwell RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or RA Sliding drawer in the centre console objects which are too large behind the RB smart fortwo coupé electric drive: last bench seat or under the passenger Spectacles compartment above the driver's seat and above the front-passenger >> Loading and stowing. seats. seat RVelcro strip on the front passenger seat G WARNING for stowing a handbag The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con- RCup holder in the rear centre console tainer in place during a journey. If you use with a recess for storing a mobile phone a cup holder during a journey, the drinks Rsmart fortwo coupé electric drive: stow- container could be flung around and liquid age compartment in the lower tailgate could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could RStowage net with two net pockets on the come into contact with the liquid and, in back of the boot separator particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid.

Z 142 Stowing luggage and large objects

Locking/unlocking the glove compart- Stowing luggage and large objects ment Please note

G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occupants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. X Insert the key into the lock and turn clock- RAlways stow objects so they cannot be wise to position (to lock) or anticlock- 2 thrown around in these or similar situa- wise to position 1 (to unlock). tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- Opening the stowage compartment in trude over the top of stowage compart- the tailgate (smart fortwo coupé) ments or ruffled pockets. RAll closable stowage compartments ! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi- should be closed before beginning your mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise become damaged. journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger

>> Loading and stowing. seats.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following loading guidelines when loading and transporting luggage and loads: X Open the tailgate. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible X Pull handle : on the inside of the lower gross vehicle weight or the permissible tailgate upwards. axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants) X Lift up the cover in the direction of the arrow. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the head restraints Rensure that no items of luggage can enter the passenger compartment above or between the seats Rensure that loaded objects are stowed safely and are secured Rload heavy objects at the bottom and light objects at the top Stowing luggage and large objects 143

Rthe load compartment is the preferred Opening the boot (smart fortwo cabrio) place to stow objects Rstow heavy loads as far forwards and as Opening the tailgate low down in the load compartment as possible

Opening the load compartment (smart fortwo coupé) ! The tailgates swing to the rear, both upwards and downwards, when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above, behind and below the tailgates.

X Press the é button on the key. X Press the % button on the key. X Fold the upper tailgate upwards. X Press button : in the handle recess. X Fold down the tailgate.

Opening the rear soft top

X Pull lever : upwards. >> Loading and stowing. X Fold the lower tailgate down.

Closing the boot (smart fortwo coupé) X Open the tailgate. X Press both latch levers :. Fold the lower tailgate upwards and X Swing the rear soft top up. engage on both sides. X X Pull the upper tailgate down and press it closed. Closing the boot (smart fortwo cabrio) X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Closing the rear soft top ! When closing the tailgate, you must first lock the tail cover. Otherwise, you could break the catch lever.

X Pull the rear soft top down until it engages. X Lock the rear soft top with both latch levers.

Z 144 Using the boot separator

Closing the tailgate Folding back the seat backrest X Pull the tailgate up until it engages. Please note X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the Enlarging the load compartment: fold- event of an accident. ing the seat backrest forwards RAs a result, a backrest which is not Folding the seat backrest forwards (using engaged would press you into the seat the lever) belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could additionally cause injury. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the boot. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described.

Folding back the seat backrest (using the lever)

Seat with a lever X Pull lever :. X Lift lever ; and slide the front-passenger X Push the seat backrest back at the same seat to its rearmost position. time until it engages. X Pull lever : forwards. X Fold the seat backrest forwards at the same Folding back the seat backrest (using the >> Loading and stowing. time. handwheel)

X Turn handwheel : backwards. Folding the seat backrest forwards (using the handwheel) Using the boot separator Fitting the boot separator

G WARNING On its own, the boot cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Seat with a handwheel Always store objects so that they cannot be Turn handwheel : forward. X flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. Removing/fitting the charging cable bag 145

by using lashing material, even if you are Hooking and unhooking the boot sep- using the boot cover. arator

For easier fitting, fold the front-passenger X Grip boot separator : in the middle and seat backrest forwards. pull it back. X Hook boot separator into left and right rear X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and lower tailgate. brackets A. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tailgate. Removing/fitting the charging cable X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top up. bag X Hold boot separator : with the luggage net bag in the direction of the passenger Removing the charging cable bag compartment in the boot. X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on the right side. >> Loading and stowing.

X Turn both buttons : to the left. The buttons are released from the anchorage. Fold the charging cable bag to the left. Slide handle to the right and hold. X X ? The Velcro fasteners under the charging X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on cable bag are detached. the left side. X Remove snap hook ;. X Release handle ?. Boot separator : snaps into place. X Secure the luggage net bag with the Velcro fasteners. If boot separator : is not required and no subwoofer is installed, it can be attached to brackets =.

Z 146 Removing/fitting the charging cable bag

Installing the charging cable bag

X Place the charging cable bag with its side resting on the engine compartment cover and then position it on the side trim. X Position the charging cable bag in a vertical position. Take hold of the Velcro fasteners beneath the charging cable bag. X Push both buttons : into the anchorage and turn them to the right. X Secure snap hook ;. >> Loading and stowing. Opening and closing the service cover 147

Useful information X Insert the connector. X Place the subwoofer at the base of the side The engine compartment in the smart is trim. located at the rear, below the boot. Service X Turn quick-release fastener : upwards. fluid reservoirs are located under the service X Press the bracket into the recess in side cover at the front. trim ;. When working on the vehicle, always comply X Turn quick-release fastener : to the with all safety regulations. Always have right. work in the engine compartment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Opening and closing the service cover Removing/fitting the subwoofer Please note Removing the subwoofer G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before driving off.

G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There X Release quick-release fastener : in the direction of the arrow. is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers X Reach into the recess on the quick-release fastener. and the ignition before you open the ser- X Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to the vice cover. right. >> Maintenance and care. To ensure unhindered air intake, com- X Pull out the connector. ! pletely remove any dirt or snow from the ventilation slots above the service cover. Fitting the subwoofer The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. On vehicles with a lockable service cover, the service cover must be unlocked before it is opened.

Z 148 Opening and closing the service cover

Unlocking the service cover Closing the service cover

X Insert the tip of the key into the opening of X Lift service cover =. lock cover :. X Slide bars A on the left and right of the X Press the key to the right ; to lever up the service cover under the bars on wing ?. lock cover. X Remove the lock cover. X Insert the key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise.

Opening the service cover

X Press service cover = downwards. X Press both levers ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. >> Maintenance and care.

Locking the service cover

X Pull both levers ; in the direction of the arrow. X Lift service cover = at the front. X Pull service cover = slightly forwards and lift upwards. X Carefully rest service cover =, still attached to the straps, against the front of the vehicle.

X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. X Insert lock cover : on the driver's side and snap it into place. Checking service products and topping up 149

Checking service products and topping X Open the service cover. up X Check reservoir ; visually. The fluid level must be between the MIN Please note mark and the MAX mark. WARNING G Topping up the coolant Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. G WARNING Observe the instructions on the respective The cooling system is pressurised when original container when using, storing and the drive system is at operating tempera- disposing off service products. Always ture. When you open the cap, you could be store service products in the sealed origi- scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There nal container. Always keep service prod- is a risk of injury. ucts out of the reach of children. Let the drive system cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protec- H Environmental note tion when opening. Open the cap slowly to Dispose of service products in an environ- relieve pressure. mentally-responsible manner. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed Also observe the information in the "Service with the desired antifreeze protection. You products" section (Y page 202). could otherwise damage the engine. Service products include the following: Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications RCoolant for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on RBrake fluid the Internet at RWindscreen washer fluid http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- RClimate control system refrigerant tact a qualified specialist workshop. Service products approved by smart: http:// If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in bevo.mercedes-benz.com the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 130 †.

Checking the coolant and topping up The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen- >> Maintenance and care. tration in the engine cooling system should Checking the coolant level be 50% (antifreeze protection down to -37 †). This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -25 †. X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If necessary, allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn the cap further and remove it. X Top up the coolant to the MAX level. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go. X Close the service cover. X Stop the vehicle on a level surface. X Let the coolant cool down for at least i See "Technical data" for information on 30 minutes. recommended coolants.

Z 150 Checking wheels and tyres

Topping up the washer fluid G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation WARNING G pressure loss. As a result, you could lose Windscreen washer concentrate is highly control of your vehicle. There is a risk of flammable. If it comes into contact with hot accident. components in the front compartment, it Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam- may ignite. There is a risk of fire and age and replace any damaged tyres imme- injury. diately. Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled next to the filler WARNING neck. G Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dis- sipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adap- ted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across X Open the service cover. the entire width of all tyres. X Pull cap : upwards at the tab. Minimum tyre tread depth for: X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. Rsummer tyres: 3 mm RM+S tyres: 4 mm X Top up with washer fluid. X If available, push the removable nozzle For safety reasons, replace the tyres before down and push it inside. the legally prescribed limit for the mini-

>> Maintenance and care. X Replace and tightly screw on cap :. mum tyre tread depth is reached. X Close the service cover. ! If you cannot avoid driving over obsta- i See "Technical data" for information on cles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an windscreen washer fluid and antifreeze. obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. Modification work on the brake system and Checking wheels and tyres wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This Warning invalidates the general operating permit for G the vehicle. A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, Check the wheels and tyres for damage at steering and braking characteristics of the least once a month, as well as after driving vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. off-road or on poorly surfaced roads. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for the replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, first 100 km. The tyres only attain their max- or consult a qualified specialist workshop. imum performance after this distance. Vibrations, audible noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side, can indicate damage to wheels or tyres. Changing a wheel 151

If you suspect a tyre defect: When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the X Reduce vehicle speed. correct: X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Rdesignation X Check the wheels and tyres for damage. If you find no signs of damage, have the Rmanufacturer wheels and tyres checked at a specialist Rtype workshop. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Changing a wheel Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in Please note the area of the valve, since this could damage the electronic components. G WARNING Only have tyres changed at a qualified Interchanging the front and rear wheels specialist workshop. may severely impair the driving charac- ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- teristics if the wheels or tyres have differing points intended for this purpose. Raise ent dimensions. The wheel brakes or sus- the vehicle for a short time only to change pension components may also be damaged. the wheel. Make sure the vehicle is on a There is a risk of accident. suitable surface and that no-one is in the vehicle. Secure the vehicle using chocks Interchange front and rear wheels only if and apply the parking brake. the wheels and tyres are of the same Interchanging front and rear wheels or tires dimensions. of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum Rules for selecting new tyres speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre ! For safety reasons, smart recommends bursting. There is a risk of accident. that you only use tyres and wheels which Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes have been specifically approved by smart

approved for your vehicle model. Observe for your vehicle. These are specially adap- >> Maintenance and care. the tyre load rating and speed rating ted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. required for your vehicle. Only use tyres and wheels specifically tested and approved by smart. Certain G WARNING characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are noise emissions or fuel consumption, may used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of tion, when driving with a load, dimen- an accident. sional variations and different tyre deformation characteristics could cause the Always replace wheels and tyres with tyres to make contact with the bodywork those that fulfil the specifications of the and axle components. This could result in original part. damage to the tyres or the vehicle. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit smart accepts no liability for damage the correct: resulting from the use of tyres or wheels other than those tested and approved. Rdesignation Information on wheels and tyres can be Rtype obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart centre.

Z 152 Changing a wheel

The service life of tyres depends on various Removing a wheel factors, including the following: RDriving style G WARNING RTyre pressure If you do not position the jack correctly at RMileage the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- Observe the following rules for selecting new cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle tyres: raised. There is a risk of injury. RObserve country-specific regulations Only position the jack at the appropriate which stipulate or recommend a certain jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the tyre type for the vehicle. jack must be positioned vertically, directly ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type under the jacking point of the vehicle. and make. ROnly tyres of the same size may be used on ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. a single axle (left/right). The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel ROnly use tyres of the same type (summer hubs could otherwise be damaged when tyres, all-season tyres, winter tyres). the bolts are tightened. RUse only wheel-tyre combinations ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- approved by smart. ing points intended for this purpose. RDo not wear tyres out too much. This oth- Never position the jack on the high-volt- erwise significantly reduces the traction age battery. Do not jack up the vehicle on on wet roads (aquaplaning). the high-voltage battery. There is other- RReplace tyres after six years at the latest. wise a risk of damaging the high-voltage battery. i Recommended tyre pressures for various operating states can be found on the tyre Also observe the notes in the "Changing a pressure table on the driver's side door wheel" section. pillar (B-pillar). You can find further information regarding tyres and wheels at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops and at any smart centre. >> Maintenance and care. Preparing to change a wheel The vehicle tool tray is located under the glove compartment. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. Warning stickers X Apply the parking brake. X Position the front wheels to point straight ahead. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Changing a wheel 153

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Using both hands, grasp two hub cap openings and remove the hub cap.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap cover: X Remove the hub cap cover.

X Position jack ; behind the triangular indentations for jacking point :.

X Set the foot of the jack up vertically with respect to the jacking point on the vehicle. X Raise the vehicle using the jack until the tyre is a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheel X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. bolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew the Remove the wheel. wheel bolts completely. X >> Maintenance and care.

Fitting a wheel

G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. The vehicle may only be raised at the desig- nated jacking points. These points ; are WARNING located in the front and the rear directly next G to the wheels. Do not position jack = on the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts edge of sill :. Otherwise, damage to the when the vehicle is raised, the jack could vehicle could occur. tip over. There is a risk of injury.

Z 154 Using the tyre pressure monitor

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to ?. The tightening torque must be when the vehicle is on the ground. 105 Nm. X Check the recommended tyre pressure and ! When changing a wheel, use only wheel adjust if necessary. bolts that have been approved for the i Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys- wheel rim and vehicle. tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped Always pay attention to the instructions and with functioning sensors. safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 151).

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Fit hub cap A such that valve B does not Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota- become trapped. tion only according to their direction of rota- X Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheel tion. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre with both hands until you hear the hub cap indicates its correct direction of rotation. engage. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Check to make sure the hub cap is seated surfaces. securely on the wheel. X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub cov- press it on. ers: X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them Fit the hub cap cover. slightly. X >> Maintenance and care. Storing wheels

X Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use. X Protect against oil, grease and fuel.

Using the tyre pressure monitor Useful information

Lower the vehicle all the way. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre X pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- X Remove the jack. sure suitable for the operating situation. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- The tyre pressure monitor issues a warning wise pattern in sequence indicated : when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor works properly only if sensors are present in all four tyres, Checking the tyre pressures 155 and after the monitor has learned the correct If the Tyre pressure monitor restarted tyre pressure for the current operating sit- message does not appear after 5 seconds, uation. This occurs automatically in most repeat the tyre pressure monitor restart. situations, but may also be specified after restarting the tyre pressure monitor. Before restarting, check the tyres for the recom- Checking the tyre pressures mended tyre pressure. The tyre pressure monitor does not provide a Please note warning in the following cases: WARNING REven loss of pressure on multiple tyres G RSudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose penetration by a foreign body the following risks: RIncorrectly set tyre pressure Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow load and vehicle speed increase. warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor Rthe driving characteristics, as well as (on-board computer with a mono- steering and braking, may be greatly chrome display) impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. Observe the recommended tyre pressure X On the multifunction lever press the ´ and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: button repeatedly until the ° and h Rat least every two weeks symbols are displayed in the instrument cluster display. Rwhen the load changes X Press and hold the a button on the mul- Rbefore embarking on a longer journey tifunction lever. Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. The ° and h symbols will flash in off-road driving the instrument cluster display for about 5 seconds. The two symbols then light up. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. >> Maintenance and care. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted. G WARNING If you mount unsuitable accessories onto Restarting the tyre pressure monitor tyre valves, the tyre valves may be over- (on-board computer with colour dis- loaded and malfunction, which can cause play) tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pressure monitoring systems will cause the X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. tyre valve to remain open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor in the on-board computer. of an accident. The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐ Only screw standard valve caps or valve rent pressures as new reference val‐ caps specifically approved by smart for ues? message appears in the display. your vehicle onto the tyre valve. X Select yes and press a to confirm. The display shows the Tyre pressure WARNING monitor restarted message. G If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre

Z 156 Using winter tyres

pressure that is too low may result in a tyre X Check the tyre pressure with a suitable blow-out. There is a risk of accident. tyre pressure gauge. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, Using winter tyres contact a qualified specialist workshop. WARNING Environmental note G H M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter every 14 days. as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced.

At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle therefore to winter tyres or all-season tyres marked with M+S. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. smart cannot accept responsi- The table with the recommended tyre pres- bility for this type of damage. sure for various operating conditions can be Have the vehicle winterproofed at a qualified found on the driver's side door pillar specialist workshop at the onset of winter. (B-pillar). X At low temperatures, use only winter tyres The tyre pressure table may also state air marked with M+S. pressures for different load conditions. X When road conditions are wintry, use These are defined in the table as different M+S tyres with the additional i snow- >> Maintenance and care. numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- flake symbol. gage. The actual number of seats may differ These tyres allow driving safety systems, from this. e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the win- If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the ter. tyre pressure information following is only X Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread valid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are not on all wheels. specified, the tyre pressures stated on the X When driving with M+S tyres, observe the tyre pressure table apply for all approved specified maximum permissible speed. tyres. X Use only tyre types and sizes approved for smart. X When using tyres with a specified direc- Checking and correcting the tyre pres- tion of rotation, observe the arrow on the sure manually sidewall indicating the tyre's direction of Only check the tyre pressure once the tyres rotation. have cooled down. X Drive the vehicle less than 2 km. X Park the vehicle away from direct sunlight for at least three hours. Changing the window wiper blades 157

After fitting M+S tyres: Changing the window wiper blades Check tyre pressure. X Please note X Restart tyre pressure monitor. X If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per- WARNING missible speed than that of the vehicle are G fitted, affix an appropriate warning label If the windscreen wipers begin to move in the driver's field of vision. Using the while you are changing the wiper blades, limiter, restrict the speed to the maximum you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There permissible speed for M+S tyres. is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper Using snow chains blades.

WARNING ! Never open the service cover or tailgate if G a wiper arm has been folded away from the If you have fitted snow chains to the front windscreen or rear window. Never fold a wheels, they may scrape against the vehi- wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto cle body or chassis components. This could the windscreen or rear window. Hold the cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. wiper arm firmly when you change the There is a risk of an accident. wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the To avoid hazardous situations: window, the window may be damaged by Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels the force of the impact. Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. Changing the window wiper blades on ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow the windscreen chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been >> Maintenance and care. specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe country-specific regulations. X Use only snow chains approved for smart. X Fit snow chains on both rear wheels. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. X Use snow chains only on snow-covered roads. X Press release clips ; on mounting ? in X When driving with snow chains fitted, do the direction of windscreen 3. The catch not exceed the maximum permissible tab is released from the mounting and the speed of 50 km/h. window wiper blades can be removed from the wiper arm. X Slide window wiper blade : in the direction of arrow 5 until the securing hook for the window wiper blade is revealed. X Remove the window wiper blade.

Z 158 Cleaning the vehicle

Cleaning the vehicle Useful information Regular care maintains the appearance and quality of the vehicle over time. Observe the following when cleaning and caring for the vehicle: X Do not clean the engine. X Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging. X Use soft, moist cloths. X Use care products and cleaning agents X Slide new window wiper blade : in the recommended and approved by smart. direction of arrow 4 onto mounting = of Do not use acidic cleaning agents. wiper arm ;. X The window wiper blade snaps into place. X In winter, carefully remove road salt as soon as possible. X Check that the window wiper blade is positioned correctly. X Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the windscreen. Cleaning the vehicle exterior Washing in an automatic car wash or washing by hand Changing the rear window wiper blade (smart fortwo coupé) Preparing the vehicle for cleaning G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking effi- >> Maintenance and care. ciency.

X Close the side windows completely. X Switch off the climate control blower. X Remove key from ignition lock. X Turn the windscreen wipers to position 0. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until you hear it engage. Notes on care of matt paintwork X Unscrew window wiper blade ; in the ! The following can give the paint a glossy direction of the arrow until it is released appearance and thus reduce the matt from the retainer on the wiper arm. effect: X Pull out window wiper blade ;. RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents Press new window wiper blade ; onto X RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight wiper arm : until it engages. X Check that window wiper blade ; is posi- ! Only use automatic car washes which tioned correctly. correspond to the latest technological standards. Never use wash programs X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. which finish by treating the vehicle with hot wax. Cleaning the vehicle 159

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- Do not use high-pressure cleaners with ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- These products are only suitable for high- gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with nents replaced immediately. matt paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, ! Always maintain a distance of at least spotted areas. 30 cm between the vehicle and the high- Always have paintwork repairs carried out pressure cleaner nozzle. Information at a qualified specialist workshop. about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork around when cleaning your vehicle. shiny. Do not aim directly at any of the following: If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, Rtyres observe these notes. By doing so, you can avoid paintwork damage due to incorrect Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. handling. Relectrical components Rbattery Washing in the automatic car wash Rconnectors X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. Rlights X Remove excess dirt. Rseals X Drive through the automatic car wash. Rventilation slots X Remove wax from the front windscreen and Damaged seals or electrical components the wiper blades. can lead to leaks or failures. i If the windscreen wipers leave smears X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. after the vehicle has passed through the X Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm car wash, this may be caused by wax or between the high-pressure cleaner nozzle other residue. This residue can be removed and the vehicle. with washer fluid. X Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning. Washing by hand X Locate a washing bay equipped for hand- Cleaning the reversing camera washing. >> Maintenance and care. X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft vehicle sponge. X Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gentle jet of water; do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille. X Dry the vehicle off with a chamois. Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt X Clean camera lens : with water and a soft grinders) can cause damage not visible cloth. from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 160 Cleaning the vehicle

Cleaning the sensors dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time.

X Clean the wheels with an acid-free cleaning agent.

Cleaning the windows and windscreen wipers

Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. : Active Brake Assist sensor ; Parking aid sensors X Place the wiper arms in the vertical position and fold them away from the window. X Clean sensors with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent recommended by smart. Cleaning the wheels X Clear deposits regularly from the windscreen and rear window to ensure that G WARNING water can drain unhindered. The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible Cleaning the window wiper blades from the outside to tyres or chassis com- X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- ponents. Components damaged in this way tion and fold them away from the window.

>> Maintenance and care. can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an X Clean the window wiper blades with a soft accident. cloth. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with X Fold the wiper arms back into place. circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Cleaning the panoramic roof (smart fortwo Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- coupé) nents replaced immediately. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod- cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. ucts to remove brake dust. This could dam- Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning age wheel bolts and brake components. cloths could scratch or damage the plastic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long cleaning agents containing solvents period of time immediately after cleaning, X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic win- particularly after cleaning the wheel rim dows and wipe off with a moist sponge. with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads Cleaning the vehicle 161

Cleaning the roof X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, Dry cleaning oils, fuels and greases by rubbing carefully with a cloth soaked in petroleum X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. ether or lighter fluid.

Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. Cleaning the vehicle interior X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. Cleaning the displays X Rinse with clean water. ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Cleaning the soft top (smart fortwo cab- Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol rio) Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household Useful information cleaning agents ! Never clean the soft top using a high- These may damage the display surface. Do pressure cleaner as water could otherwise not put pressure on the display surface enter the vehicle interior. when cleaning. This could lead to irrepar- ! Only clean the folding roof and the rear able damage to the display. soft top when they are closed. X Switch off the display and let it cool down. X Clean the display surface with a microfibre Dry cleaning cloth and cleaner for TFT/LC displays. Brush from the front to the back using a X X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- soft brush. fibre cloth. Wet cleaning Dry clean first. Cleaning the steering wheel and the X selector lever X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a leather X Rinse with clean water. care agent recommended by smart. >> Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the exterior lighting Cleaning the seat belts

X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic len- WARNING ses and wipe off with a wet sponge. G Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the Cleaning and caring for paintwork seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in ! Do not affix stickers to the painted sur- an accident. There is an increased risk of face. Adhesive residue could damage the injury, possibly even fatal. paintwork. Never bleach or colour seat belts. X Remove impurities immediately by rubbing carefully. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemi- cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off. belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off. X Clean the seat belts using only lukewarm X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. soapy water.

Z 162 Observing service due dates

Cleaning and caring for seats ! Never attach the following to plastic surfaces: Please note Rstickers ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- Rfilms uine leather or artificial leather covers, as Rperfume oil container or similar these are too aggressive and, if used often, may damage the cover. You could otherwise damage the plastic. Regular care maintains the appearance and To maintain the appearance of high-quality feel of the seats over time. plastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces to come into contact with cosmetics, insect Cleaning and caring for genuine leather repellents or sun creams. seat covers X Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth. X Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat X Use care products and cleaning agents covers. Do not allow the leather to become recommended by smart to remove heavy soaked. soiling. Wipe off with a dry cloth. X Cleaning the roof lining (smart fortwo X Apply a leather care agent recommended by smart. coupé) X Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush or Cleaning synthetic leather seat covers a cleaning agent recommended by smart. X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean the seat covers. Cleaning the carpets X Use carpet and textile cleaning agents rec- Cleaning cloth seat covers ommended by smart. X Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent water. Cleaning the trim elements X Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning entire sections of the cover. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel clean- Allow the seat to dry. X ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a Cleaning DINAMICA seat covers risk of damaging the surface. X Clean the trim elements with a moist X Wet a cloth with water. >> Maintenance and care. microfibre cloth. X Clean entire sections of the cover. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended by smart to remove heavy Cleaning the trim soiling.

Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Observing service due dates Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in the cockpit to become porous. This could result instrument cluster display are reminders of upcoming service due dates: in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of R¯: minor service. injury. R°: major service. Do not use care products and cleaning Monochrome display: the indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds after the engine is agents containing solvents to clean the started. Depending on the operating condi- cockpit. tions of the vehicle, the time or distance remaining until the service is due, is also displayed. Parking up the vehicle 163

The service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Observe the following if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, e.g. regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops: X Carry out service work more often than specified by the service interval. X Check the tyres more frequently. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking up the vehicle

! Please note that if the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, vehicle damage may occur and the battery may discharge or become damaged.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop for a consultation. >> Maintenance and care.

Z 164 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown Securing the vehicle ! When a tyre is damaged, the danger area must be kept clear of all persons.

X Stop the vehicle away from traffic on solid, non-slippery ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. Switch off the engine. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps X manually: press button :. X Passengers should leave the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Set up the warning triangle. Operating the emergency assistance In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT the system vehicle cannot be made roadworthy again using the on-board equipment. No emer- Useful information gency call can be made via the smart Audio- System. The vehicle owner and the driver of For Russia only: the vehicle are responsible for equipping the The emergency assistance system is there to vehicle with an appropriate breakdown kit rescue you and others in an emergency. and seeking assistance in the event of a Should the driver arrive at the scene of an breakdown. accident, or feel unwell, an emergency call can be initiated. The emergency call must not be deployed in the case of a breakdown or a Switching the hazard warning lamps on similar, non-dangerous situation. and off The emergency assistance system can help to radically reduce the time between an acci- When the hazard warning lamps are dent and the arrival of the emergency serv- switched on, all the turn signal lamps flash. ices. The requirement is a stable mobile The hazard warning lamps automatically phone connection; network coverage can switch on in the following cases: depend on the region. Ran airbag is deployed. If there is no safety risk, in the event of an >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. accident the vehicle occupants should Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a remain in the vehicle after initiating an speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a emergency call. standstill. The emergency assistance system has a sep- The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- arate battery. The battery only functions matically if a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded within a temperature range of -20 † to 85 †. again after full brake application. The battery must be replaced every four years. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Method of operation After an emergency call has been initiated, the emergency call centre will ascertain if assistance is required on location. Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown 165

In the event of an emergency, accident data X If the voice message is correctly played is forwarded to a public emergency call back, press and hold SOS button = for five centre. The data transferred includes: seconds. RGPS/GLONASS position data Indicator lamp ? flashes green slowly. RDirection of travel or RTime of initiation X If the voice message is incorrectly played This allows measures for rescue, recovery or back or not played back at all, press SOS towing away to be initiated quickly. button = three times within three seconds. The emergency assistance system consists of Indicator lamp flashes red slowly for a loudspeaker, the control panel and the tel- ? five seconds. ecommunication system. The control panel is located in the overhead control panel. Automatic emergency call Indicator lamp : shows if an automatic emergency call can be initiated. If airbags are deployed, the emergency assistance system automatically notifies an emergency centre. i The automatic emergency call is operational as standard.

Triggering an emergency call manually

: Automatic emergency call indicator lamp Manually initiating an emergency call as a ; Microphone person involved in an accident: = SOS button X Press and hold SOS button = for three sec- ? Call and reception status indicator lamp onds. An emergency call is made. Using test mode Manually initiating an emergency call after witnessing an accident: In test mode, the driver can check if the emergency assistance system is working. To X Press SOS button = five times within ten do this, a voice message from the driver is seconds. recorded and the test result is transmitted to The emergency call centre is informed of the accident. the emergency call centre. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Briefly press SOS button = several times within five seconds. X Wait fort 25 seconds. X Briefly press SOS button = three times within ten seconds. A tone sounds. The microphone records for ten seconds. X Speak any message. A signal sounds after 25 seconds. The recorded message is played back via the loudspeaker. 166 Removing the first-aid kit

Securing the vehicle against rolling Using the warning triangle away Removing the warning triangle Securing on level ground

Warning triangle : is secured behind the X When changing a wheel, place chocks or driver's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. other suitable items under the front and X Fold the driver's seat forwards. rear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo- Remove warning triangle :. site the wheel you wish to change. X Setting up the warning triangle Securing on a downhill gradient

X Fold feet 3 out to the side. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Place wheel chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a axle. triangle. X Connect the reflectors using upper stud 1. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance.

Removing the first-aid kit

i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing parts. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 167

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit Useful information The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread, at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †.

Please note First-aid kit : is secured behind the driver's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. G WARNING Return it to this location after use. In the following situations, the tyre seal- X Fold the driver's seat forwards. ant is unable to provide sufficient break- X Remove first-aid kit :. down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre Removing the fire extinguisher larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front passenger seat. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Removing the vehicle tool tray Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are loca- RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin ted in the vehicle tool tray under the glove immediately with water. compartment. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact X Remove bolts in the front-passenger foot- with your eyes, immediately rinse them well. thoroughly with clean water. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.

Z 168 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. X Unwind plug : with the cable from tyre You should therefore adapt your driving inflation compressor ;. style accordingly and drive carefully. Do X Remove hose A from the bottom section of not exceed the specified maximum speed tyre inflation compressor ;. with a tyre that has been repaired using X Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot- tyre sealant. tle ?. X Connect hose A. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety X Remove valve flap from valve E on the instructions on the sticker on the tyre infla- faulty tyre. tion compressor. X Unscrew cap from filler hose =.

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Screw filler hose = onto valve E. Filling with tyre sealant X Insert connector : into the cigarette lighter socket or the 12 V socket. X Leave foreign bodies which have penetra- X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition ted the tyre in the tyre. lock. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation X Remove the TIREFIT kit, consisting of a compressor ; to position 1. tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflation The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. compressor, from the vehicle tool kit. The pressure may briefly rise to approx- X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker to imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi) in pressure the instrument cluster within the driver's gauge C. field of vision. i Preventing damage to the tyre inflation compressor Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 169

Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- X Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre pressor during this phase. inflation compressor.

X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a X Perform a test drive. maximum of 15 minutes, then allow it to The maximum permissible speed for a tyre cool down. sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa X Stop after driving for approximately 3 km and check the tyre pressure with the tyre (1.8 bar/26 psi) in pressure gauge C. inflation compressor. Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It can The tyre pressure must now be at least then be removed like a layer of film. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise values Have any clothing stained with tyre sealant are located on the door pillar (B-pillar) on cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- the driver's side. ethylene. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on the sealed tyre. Further procedure if the pressure of the Please note that tyre sealant may escape sealed tyre is below 180 kPa when unscrewing. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the WARNING X G sealed tyre. If the specified tyre pressure still cannot X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. inflation compressor. The filler hose stays The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in on the tyre sealant bottle. this instance. Damaged tyres and low tyre X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist pressures can significantly impair the workshop and have the tyre changed there. vehicle's braking and driving character- X Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler hose istics. There is a risk of an accident. replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Adjusting the tyre pressure X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Increasing the tyre pressure Please note that tyre sealant may escape X Switch on the tyre inflation compressor. when unscrewing. X Observe the display.

X Slow move the vehicle approximately 10 m >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. forwards or backwards. Reducing the tyre pressure X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi).

Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is at least 180 kPa

X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing.

Z 170 Towing the vehicle

X Press button : next to pressure gauge ;. than the permissible gross weight of your i Even unused tyre sealant loses its effec- vehicle. tiveness over time. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every Information on the vehicle's permissible four years at a qualified specialist work- gross mass can be found on the vehicle iden- shop. tification plate (Y page 200). ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: Towing the vehicle Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on Please note both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer G WARNING than legally permitted. Mark the tow Safety relevant functions are restricted or rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users no longer available if: aware that a vehicle is being towed. Rthe ignition is switched off Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing Rthe brake system or power steering is eye. malfunctioning Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage a distance so that the tow rope does not supply or the vehicle's electrical system. sag. When your vehicle is towed, you may Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow require considerably more effort to steer your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- and brake. There is a risk of an accident. age the vehicle. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery towing away, make sure the steering purposes as this could damage the vehicle. moves freely. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. G WARNING ! When towing, pull away slowly and If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of Always switch on the ignition when towing 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. be exceeded. with a tow rope or a towing bar. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. WARNING G Observe the legal requirements for the rele- When towing or tow-starting another vant countries when towing. vehicle and its weight is greater than the Always have the vehicle transported in the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, following cases: the: RThe warning lamp lights up and Do Rtowing eye may be torn off not tow vehicle with wheels on ground Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or appears in the display of the instrument even overturn cluster. There is a risk of an accident. RThe multifunction display is not working. ROne of more of the following warning lamps When towing or tow-starting another is lit up: vehicle, its weight should not be greater - þ drive diagnostics (red) - # 12 V battery Towing the vehicle 171

RThe brake pedal begins to pulsate as soon X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle as the towing procedure commences. tool tray. RThe vehicle must be moved over a long dis- X Carefully prise off cover : on the vehicle. tance. X Screw in the towing eye to the stop. The transmission must be in position i when the vehicle is being towed. i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the Towing the vehicle with both axles on automatic locking feature. The driver the ground could otherwise be locked out when push- ing or having the vehicle towed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car- depressed. rier fitted. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to the tion i. basic carrier. The selector lever lock can be manually Observe the notes on the selector lever when released in the event of an electrical mal- towing the vehicle. function. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. Fitting the towing eye X Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Transporting the vehicle ! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as the axle or steering components. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Shift the transmission to position i. As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Remove the key. X Lash down the vehicle.

Removing the towing eye

X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Attach the cover to the recess at the top and engage it at the bottom. X Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool The towing eye can be attached to the front or tray. rear of the vehicle.

Z 172 Replacing the bulbs

Manually releasing the selector lever Replacing the bulbs lock Please note In cases of an electrical fault the selector WARNING lever lock can be manually deactivated, e.g. G if the parking lock has been deactivated for Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can towing and should subsequently be re- become very hot during use. When replac- applied. ing a bulb, you could burn yourself on ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to these components. There is a risk of injury. prise out the cover from the centre console. Allow these components to cool down Otherwise, the cover or the centre console before replacing the bulb. could be damaged. Observe the following rules when replacing bulbs: ROnly replace bulbs when the engine is switched off. RDo not use bulbs that have been dropped or show signs of visible damage, e.g. scratches. RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. ROnly use bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. ROnly fit spare bulbs of the same type and X Apply the parking brake. with a specified voltage. X Open the drawer on the front-passenger RDo not allow bulbs to come into contact side. with moisture. X Prise out cover : on the centre console RHave LEDs changed at qualified specialist from bottom edge ; using with a flat, workshops only. blunt object. Change only the bulbs described below your- X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. self in accordance with the specified bulb types.

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Replacing front bulbs Changing dipped-beam and main-beam headlamps

X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up and simultaneously press release button ? on the selector lever. X Shift the gear selector lever to position i or j. Replacing the bulbs 173

X Switch off the lights. Replacing the side turn signal lamps X Open the service cover. X Remove cover :. X Pull out the connector. X Press retainer ; inwards and to the left. X Pull the bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Lock retainer ;. X Insert the connector. X Replace and engage cap :.

Replacing the front turn signal lamps X Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :. X Prise out side turn signal ;. X Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Refit side turn signal ;.

Replacing rear bulbs Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs X Switch off the lights. X Turn the respective front wheel inwards. X Push clamp : downwards. X Remove cover ; upwards. X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb.

X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock- >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. wise until it engages. X Insert and engage cover ;. : Rear/brake lamp ; Rear fog lamp = Reversing lamp ? Turn signals

Z 174 Replacing the bulbs

Tail lamps with partial LEDs Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb

: Turn signals : Rear lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without ; Reversing lamp partial LEDs) ; Turn signals Removing the tail lamp cover = Reversing lamp ? Rear fog lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs)

X Release four tabs A on the bulb holder. X Remove the bulb holder. X Pull the faulty bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Refit the bulb holder. X Insert the connector. X Insert the tail lamp until you hear it engage. X Tighten the screws on the tail lamp. X Switch off the lights. X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and lower tailgate. Replacing the licence plate lighting X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tailgate. X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. up. X Loosen screws :. X Remove the tail lamp. X Carefully insert a flat tool under the plastic hanger on the tail lamp. X Lift the connector and remove it.

X Insert a flat tool into recess :. X Remove the cover from the licence plate lamp. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate lamp. Changing fuses 175

Replacing the interior lighting If new fuses blow, the cause for this must be diagnosed and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Preparing the vehicle to change a fuse

X Apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. X Check whether all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off.

X Insert a flat tool into the recess. X Prise out lamp lens :. Replacing a fuse (left-hand drive vehi- X Remove the bulb from the holder. cle) X Insert the new bulb into the holder. Do not use a pointed object such as a X Refit the lamp lens. ! screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. Changing fuses Please note

G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. X Open the front-passenger door.

! Only use fuses that have been approved X Open the glove compartment. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. for smart vehicles and which have the cor- X To open: open cover : in the direction of rect fuse rating for the system concerned. the arrow. Components or systems could otherwise be Replace the faulty fuse. damaged. X X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the engages. fuse box when the cover is open. X Close the glove compartment. The electrical fuses disconnect defective cir- cuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected components and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 203).

Z 176 Replacing the key battery

Replacing a fuse (right-hand drive charged batteries to a vehicle) qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

X Open the driver’s door. X To open: turn quick-release fastener ; by 90° using a suitable object. X Fixed keys: unscrew screw :. X Fold down cover :. X Replace the faulty fuse. X To close: close cover :. X Close quick-release fastener ;.

Replacing the key battery

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can

result in severe health problems. There is a X Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the recess. risk of fatal injury. X Turn the tool until the cover of the battery Keep batteries out of the reach of children. tray opens. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling sys- X Replace battery ; with the positive ter- tem. minal facing upwards. Dispose of batteries in an X Replace the cover on the battery tray and environmentally respon- push it closed. sible manner. Take dis- Locking the doors in an emergency 177

X Fixed keys: screw in screw :. Locking the doors in an emergency X Check the function of all key buttons. Locking the doors with the locking button Opening a door with the emergency release

X Open the driver’s door. X Close the other doors and the tailgate. X Press and hold button :. An audible lock- If the vehicle cannot be opened using the ing and unlocking sound can be heard. remote control key, the vehicle can be opened Wait until the third (locking) sound, before using the emergency release. releasing button :. If the driver's door is unlocked and opened X Leave the vehicle and close the driver's with the key in the emergency release, the door. anti-theft alarm system will issue an alarm. The doors, tailgate and socket cap are To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. locked. The anti-theft alarm system is X Carefully remove the cover from the emer- primed. gency release. X From the outside, check that the doors, X Insert the key into the emergency release tailgate and socket cap are locked. on the driver's door. X Turn the key anti-clockwise. X Remove the key from the lock. Locking the doors with the emergency X Push the cover into the emergency release locking until it engages.

X Open the door. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X To disable the alarm from the anti-theft alarm system: switch on the ignition. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emergency release is located on the front- passenger door.

X Insert the key into slot : on the left door. X Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as it will go to position 2. X Close the left door.

Z 178 Locking the doors in an emergency

X Repeat the procedure described above on the right door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using emergency locking, the tailgate and socket cap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Locking and unlocking 179

Notes on display messages Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. The display shows warnings, malfunctions or additional information. A warning tone Colour display: low-priority display mes- also sounds with some display messages. sages can be hidden by pressing a on the steering wheel. High-priority messages are Messages from all categories can contain shown in red. The display messages are then important information that must be stored in the message memory and can be observed. Have error messages checked at a called up for as long as the ignition remains Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon as switched on. Switching off the ignition clears possible. If an error message is not followed the message memory. up with a repair, this can lead to damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty including injuries or material damage.

Locking and unlocking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key will not lock or A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal. unlock the vehicle. X Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehicle again. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or lock the vehicle with emergency locking. X Replace the key battery.

Key is faulty. To lock: X Press the locking button and close the door within five seconds. The vehicle still will not lock. X Lock driver's door using emergency locking. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. To unlock:

X Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release. >> Practical advice. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key is lost. X Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer.

Warning tone sounds. Driver's door is opened while the engine is running. Switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle:

X Apply the parking brake. X Select transmission position j. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. 180 Visibility, occupants, airbags

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Side window will not Objects are obstructing the window guide. close or will not open or Remove objects. close fully. X Side window is not reset. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch for closing the window until the window is closed, and then push the switch for one second. The side window opens again a little way. X Repeat previous step until the window remains closed after releasing the switch.

C Red warning lamp Door or tailgate is open. is lit. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and If the speed exceeds traffic conditions. 20 km/h, a warning Close all doors and the tailgate. tone also sounds. X Colour display: the display shows an open door/tailgate.

Visibility, occupants, airbags

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Exterior mirror is not The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards by >> Practical advice. engaged. force. X Carefully move exterior mirror to the correct position.

Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow. have malfunctioned. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds. Visibility, occupants, airbags 181

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen wiper will Combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. not stop or always X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and wipes at the same traffic conditions. speed. X Remove the key from ignition lock.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock, turn to position 1 and start the engine.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 7 Red warning lamp Warning lamp prompts driver and front passenger to fasten their lights up for seat belts. six seconds after start- Fasten seat belts. ing the engine (certain X countries only). Warning tone sounds. 7 Red warning lamp Driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. lights up after starting Fasten seat belts. the engine. X 7 Red warning lamp Driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the flashes. vehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h. Warning tone sounds. X Fasten seat belts. 6 Red warning lamp Restraint system is malfunctioning. lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING Colour display: Mal‐ If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system function Visit work‐ components may be triggered unintentionally or may not shop appears. deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at >> Practical advice. a qualified specialist workshop.

4 Indicator lamp on The front-passenger front airbag has been deactivated the overhead control (Y page 39). panel lights up. X Activate front-passenger front airbag.

Z 182 Engine, brakes, transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger front airbag has not been deactivated and is malfunctioning. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on front- passenger seat. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

× Indicator lamp on The front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 39). The air- the overhead control bag system is operating correctly. panel lights up. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on front- passenger seat.

× Indicator lamp on Malfunction in the airbag system. the overhead control Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. panel does not light up X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. if the front-passenger X front airbag has been activated manually.

Engine, brakes, transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Engine will not start Steering lock is manually locked. using the key. X Remove the key from the ignition lock and then reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Turn the key. X Turn the steering wheel left and right.

þ Red warning lamp Serious malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system. lights up. The engine can no longer be started. Warning tone sounds. X Do not restart the engine. Without starting X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. motor again, visit

>> Practical advice. workshop appears. þ Red warning lamp High-voltage electrical system, engine or high-voltage battery is lights up. malfunctioning. Stop Switch off X Switch off the engine. motor appears. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. Engine, brakes, transmission 183

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions þ Red warning lamp Communication with the engine's control unit is disrupted. lights up. X Switch off the engine. Warning tone sounds. X Do not drive on. Stop appears. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. þ Yellow warning Malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system. The vehicle's lamp lights up. high-voltage electrical system may become damaged if you con- Warning tone sounds. tinue running the engine. Malfunction Visit X Switch off the engine. workshop appears. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. þ Red warning lamp Speed of the vehicle is above 135 km/h. lights up. X Reduce speed to below 135 km/h. Warning tone sounds. Reduce speed appears.

lights up. Drive system or high-voltage electrical system is faulty. Do not tow vehicle X Have the vehicle transported by a qualified specialist work- with wheels on shop. ground appears. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. J Red warning lamp Brake fluid level is too low. lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING Warning tone sounds. If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail. Colour display: Check There is a risk of an accident. brake fluid level Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. appears. Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the brake system repaired.

Do not top up the brake fluid, as this will not rectify the fault. >> Practical advice. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

J Red warning lamp Parking brake is applied. lights up while driv- Release the parking brake. ing. X Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Release parking brake appears.

Z 184 Engine, brakes, transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Red warning lamp Serious malfunction in the brake system. lights up while the Consult a qualified specialist workshop. engine is running. X Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake system malfunction Stop appears. J Yellow warning Malfunction in the vacuum supply of the brake system. lamp lights up. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Mal‐ function Visit work‐ shop appears. Monochrome display: An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in i or j flash alter- position h or k. nately in the middle of Select j or i to start. the display. X Colour display: To start engine: shift to P or N appears. Monochrome display: The driver's door is open and the selector lever is in position k, j or h/k, i flash i or h. alternately. Warning tone sounds. G WARNING Colour display: Risk The vehicle may roll away. of vehicle rolling There is a risk of an accident. away Transmission X Select position j. not in P appears. Switch off the engine. Warning tone sounds. X X Close the driver's door completely. ¯ or ° warning A service due date is approaching or has already passed: lamp flashes for a few R¯ indicates a minor service. seconds after starting R° indicates a full service. the engine. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Next X >> Practical advice. service due in … km or Service due … days ago appears. Charging process 185

Charging process

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The charge socket flap The charge socket flap is not unlocked. cannot be opened. X Press the # button on the key. The key batteries are discharged. X Opening a door with the emergency release The charging cable The vehicle socket is locked. cannot be plugged into Make sure that the selector lever is in position j. the vehicle socket. X

on the vehicle A fault occurred while initializing the charging process. socket flashes red. The X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains high-voltage battery socket. is not being charged. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds. X If the malfunction should persist, inform a qualified specialist workshop.

on the vehicle There is a malfunction at the mains socket. socket remains off X Have the mains socket checked to ensure that it is working after the charging correctly. cable connector has or been connected to the Use a different mains socket. vehicle socket. When X charging using a mains socket, the high-voltage battery is not charged. è lights up. The charging cable is plugged into the vehicle socket. The engine Warning tone sounds. cannot be started. Charger cable con‐ X Before driving off, disconnect the charging cable from the nected appears. vehicle socket and stow it away in the vehicle. è flashes. The charge cable is connected to the vehicle socket. The battery is Charging cable not not being charged. >> Practical advice. inserted correctly X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into the appears. sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, disconnect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnect it. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 186 Charging process

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The charging cable The charging cable connector is not unlocked. connector cannot be X Press the # button on the key. removed from the vehi- This unlocks the charging cable connector in the vehicle cle socket. socket. X Remove charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. Charging not possi‐ The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charge current ble Power supply was interrupted during the charging process. interrupted appears. X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains socket. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Charging not possi‐ Communication with the charging point infrastructure is not ble s. Owner's Man‐ functioning correctly. ual appears. X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into the sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, disconnect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnect it. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Use a different charging station. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. þ Yellow warning The vehicle electronics are malfunctioning. The high-voltage lamp lights up. battery cannot be charged. Charging not possi‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ble Visit workshop appears. þ Yellow warning The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charging cable lamp lights up. connector is overheated.

>> Practical advice. Charging not possi‐ X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. ble s. Owner's Man‐ X Allow the charging cable connector to cool off for several ual appears. minutes. X Plug the charging cable back into the vehicle socket. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Charging process 187

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp on The vehicle is inactive. the vehicle charging X Activate the vehicle by pressing the # button on the key and socket does not light lock it again. up. The high-voltage battery is not being charged. The charging cable The vehicle is in charging mode or has completed active charging. cannot be removed. X Unlock the charging lock by pressing the # button on the key. >> Practical advice.

Z 188 Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! Yellow warning ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva- lamp lights up. ted. Colour display: System If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving sys- inoperative appears. tems may be unavailable. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

J Red warning lamp EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind lights up while the Assist and Hill start assist are also unavailable. engine is running. Other driving systems may be deactivated. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake G WARNING force distribution The brake system continues to function normally, but without the inoperative. Stop functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if See Owner's Manual you brake hard, for example. appears. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely >> Practical advice. affected. The braking distance may increase in emergency braking situations. If ESP® is not operational, the vehicle will not be stabilised by ESP®. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 189

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ Monochrome dis- ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving systems play: yellow warning may be deactivated. lamp lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING ÷ Colour display: If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- yellow warning lamp cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. lights up. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. System inoperative ® appears. Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not drive on. X Check that the brake lamps are working. The brake lamps are not working.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Brake lamps are working.

X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ Colour display: The Brake Assist System (BAS) is inoperative. yellow warning lamp Consult a qualified specialist workshop. lights up. X Brake Assist System (BAS) inoperative appears. ÷ Yellow warning ESP® is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at least lamp flashes while one of the wheels is spinning. driving. X Pull away carefully. X Accelerate carefully whilst driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. >> Practical advice. ÷ and C and Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. other warning lamps After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or are lit. unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the Colour display: Elec‐ engine. tronics malfunction X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and Visit workshop traffic conditions. appears. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 190 Driving safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Colour display: ÷ Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held auto- Hill start assist matically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling imme- inoperative appears. diately. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Other driving systems may be deactivated. The brake system functions normally, but without hill start assist.

X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h Yellow warning The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre lamp lights up while pressure difference between the wheels is too great. driving. X Check tyre pressure. Colour display: Cor‐ X Correct the tyre pressure. rect tyre pressure Restart tyre pressure monitor. appears. X >> Practical advice. Driving safety systems 191

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of pres- lamp lights up while sure in at least one of the tyres. driving. WARNING Colour display: Tyre G pressure Caution Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: tyre malfunction Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed appears. increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions for flat tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary. h Yellow warning The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restarted lamp flashes for after a wheel change. approximately one minute and then stays G WARNING lit. If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the Run Colour display: Tyre Flat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about a pressure monitor defective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, the inoperative appears. driving characteristics and the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. >> Practical advice. If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the Run Flat Indicator.

X Restart tyre pressure monitor. The display message continues to be displayed.

X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 192 Driving safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more lamp flashes for wheels. approximately 60 seconds and then G WARNING remains lit. Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The sys- Colour display: Tyre tem is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. pressure monitor X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. inoperative wheel sensors missing Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors. appears. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. J Red warning lamp The following systems are malfunctioning: is lit. RABS (anti-lock braking system) ÷, ! yellow RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) warning lamps light up while the engine is RCrosswind Assist running. RHill start assist Warning tone sounds. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. Colour display: Elec‐ WARNING tronics malfunction G Stop See Owner's The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due to Manual appears. malfunctioning driving safety systems. The brake system functions normally, but without the systems listed. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The braking distance may increase in emergency braking situations. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. >> Practical advice. Driver assistance systems 193

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- D yellow warning cult. lamp lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely:

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely:

X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

D Yellow warning Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- lamp lights up while cult. the engine is running. WARNING Colour display: Steer‐ G ing malfunction See You will need to use more force to steer. Owner's Manual There is a risk of an accident. or X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. Electronics mal‐ function See Own‐ If you are able to steer safely: er's Manual appears. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely:

X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions >> Practical advice. · Red warning lamp Collision warning detects an obstacle on the road. is lit. X Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and be Warning tone sounds. ready to brake.

· Red warning lamp Distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current speed. is lit. X Increase the distance. ^ Yellow warning The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty. lamp lights up while Clean the sensors. driving. X Colour display: Active Brake Assist inoper‐

Z 194 Driver assistance systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ative or Electronics Environmental influences or error sources outside the system are malfunction Visit temporarily interfering with Active Brake Assist and radar- workshop appears. assisted recuperation. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow Roperating temperature is too high Ron-board voltage is too low Active Brake Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. Warning lamp remains lit:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the sensors. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp still remains lit:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ^ and C as well Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. as other warning lamps After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or are lit. unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ã flashes for Windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. approximately X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and 3 seconds. traffic conditions. Warning tone sounds. X Clean the windscreen. Colour display: Lane Keeping Assist inop‐ Environmental influences are interfering with Lane Keeping erative appears. Assist. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibility Rthe sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensor

>> Practical advice. Rlane markings cannot be detected Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. System electronics are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems 195

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¤ flashes for a max- A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turn imum of 5 seconds. signal. Colour display: Ã X Stay inside the lane boundary markings. green warning lamp X Use indicator before changing lanes. flashes for a maximum of 5 seconds. Warning tone sounds. ¯ flashes for Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. approximately Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 10 seconds. X Warning tone sounds. Colour display: ¯ Cruise control inop‐ erative appears. ¯ flashes for Central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are mal- approximately functioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer pos- 10 seconds. C and sible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the other warning lamps key or to start the engine. are also lit. X Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to Warning tone sounds. road and traffic conditions. Colour display: Elec‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. È lights up. Vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. Speed display flashes. X Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- Warning tone sounds. tions.

È flashes for Speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. approximately Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 10 seconds. X Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lim‐ iter inoperative appears. >> Practical advice. Ò Warning lamp The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a risk flashes for a minute or of black ice. lights up continuously. X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather condi- Colour display: Black tions. ice warning appears.

Z 196 Battery, lights, heating

Battery, lights, heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rear window heating Battery is not sufficiently charged. or seat heating Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. switches off automati- X cally or cannot be switched on. Ý Yellow warning The charge status of the high-voltage battery has dropped into lamp lights up. the reserve range. Battery reserve X Charge the high-voltage battery. level appears. Monochrome display: Charge status of the high-voltage battery is below 10 %. Ý Yellow warning Charge the high-voltage battery. lamp flashes. X Colour display: Ý Yellow warning lamp lights up. Battery reserve level appears. õ Display flashes. The vehicle has switched itself off because the charge status of The vehicle has the high-voltage battery is too low. After restarting the vehicle, switched itself off. depending on the charge status of the high-voltage battery, the Battery charge too vehicle can only drive on a maximum of 1 km. low Charge HV bat‐ X Park the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic condi- tery now appears. tions. X Charge the high-voltage battery.

# Red warning lamp 12 V battery is not being charged or the high-voltage battery is lights up when driving malfunctioning. or when the vehicle is X Do not drive on. ready to start. The engine may switch itself off after a short while. Warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and Colour display: Stop traffic conditions. See Owner's Manual X Switch off the engine.

>> Practical advice. appears. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. It may not be possible to drive the vehicle further and it may not be possible to restart the engine.

Colour display: # Battery monitoring is malfunctioning. Warning lamp lights Consult a qualified specialist workshop. up. X Malfunction Visit workshop appears. Monochrome display: Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. b Warning lamp Switch off the engine. lights up. X X Start the engine. Battery, lights, heating 197

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp remains lit. Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning lamp still remains lit. Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. Warning lamp lights Switch off the engine. up. X X Restart the engine. Malfunction See Own‐ er's Manual appears. Warning lamp remains lit. Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. Warning lamp lights up. G WARNING Brake lamps inoper‐ Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. ative appears. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. >> Practical advice. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Switch Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. off lights appears. X Turn control knob for the lights to Ã or u. Warning tone sounds.

Z 198 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Bluetooth® connection

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

® Bluetooth connection X Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with the cannot be established system. Information about compatible mobile phones: between the smart www.smart.com/connect Audio-System or smart X Check the security settings on your mobile phone. Media-System and ® X Check that the Bluetooth function is enabled on the smart mobile phone. Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobile phone. X Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and on the mobile phone.

The navigation system in the smart Media-System

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions No map is displayed in The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged. the navigation system. X Check to see that the SD card is inserted. Position of the vehicle GPS reception is poor. in the navigation sys- X Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception is tem does not match the better. vehicle's actual position. GPS symbol on the display is grey or yellow. The road's course in the The map data is out of date. navigation system no Update the map data. longer coincides with X the actual road. Navigation system Route guidance has not been started. does not display any Select a destination and start navigation. traffic information. X >> Practical advice. HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic has expired. X Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are in or upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic. There are no naviga- The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of date. tion messages during Check if route guidance has started. route guidance. X X If not, select a destination and start navigation. Navigation messages are switched off. X Switch on navigation messages. smart Audio-System and smart Media-System 199

Voice control system in the smart Media-System

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The voice control sys- Interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded. tem does not under- stand voice commands. X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat. X Issue voice commands from the driver's seat. Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voice commands. X Avoid interfering noises. Voice commands have not been given clearly. X Say voice commands clearly. Voice command is unknown. X Say the command “Help”. A list of possible voice commands appears. >> Practical advice.

Z 200 Reading vehicle data

Obtaining technical data

Information on technical data: www.smart.de The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. Differences will be present in the case of vehicles with optional equipment. Further information is available from any smart Centre. : Vehicle identification plate Paint code Reading vehicle data ; = Vehicle manufacturer Useful information ? EU type approval number A Vehicle identification number (VIN) RThe heights and lengths specified vary as a result of: B Maximum permissible gross weight - Tyres C Maximum permissible front axle load - Load D Maximum permissible rear axle load - Condition of the suspension i The data shown on the vehicle identifi- - Optional equipment cation plate is example data. This data is ROptional equipment reduces the maximum different for every vehicle and can deviate payload from the data shown here. The data applicable to the vehicle is found on the vehi- RVehicle-specific weight information can cle's identification plate. be found on the vehicle identification plate ROnly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC Dimensions and weights documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM- Missing technical data was not available at ITY). These documents are delivered with the time of publication. your vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate >> Technical data.

smart forfour crosstown Dimensions, edition weights and volumes : Vehicle identification plate position Opening height : 2012 mm Vehicle length 3512 mm Reading vehicle data 201 smart forfour crosstown Dimensions, smart fortwo coupé elec- Dimensions and edition weights and tric drive weights volumes Opening height : 1855 mm Vehicle width including 1875 mm exterior mirrors Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width excluding 1665 mm Vehicle width including 1893 mm exterior mirrors exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding Vehicle width excluding 1663 mm exterior mirrors for exterior mirrors vehicles equipped with Vehicle width excluding wheel trims exterior mirrors for Vehicle height 1554 mm vehicles equipped with wheel trims Wheelbase 2494 mm Vehicle height 1555 mm Maximum ground clear- 108 mm ance Wheelbase 1873 mm Permissible roof load Maximum ground clear- 113 mm ance Tank capacity Total: 35.0 l Maximum tailgate load of which reserve fuel: Permissible roof load 0 kg 5.0 l

smart fortwo cabrio elec- Dimensions and smart forfour crosstown Dimensions, tric drive weights edition weights and volumes Vehicle length 2695 mm Opening height : 2012 mm Vehicle width including 1893 mm exterior mirrors Vehicle length 3512 mm Vehicle width excluding 1663 mm Vehicle width including 1875 mm exterior mirrors exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding Vehicle width excluding 1665 mm exterior mirrors for exterior mirrors vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for Vehicle height 1553 mm vehicles equipped with wheel trims Wheelbase 1873 mm >> Technical data. Vehicle height 1554 mm Maximum ground clear- 110 mm ance Wheelbase 2494 mm Maximum tailgate load Maximum ground clear- 108 mm without side bars ance Maximum tailgate load Permissible roof load with sidebars Permissible roof load 0 kg 202 Bulb types

Charging time Service products

High-voltage battery Please note Type Lithium-ion Also observe the information in the section "Checking and refilling service products" Charging time Approx. 2 h (Y page 149). (from 20% to 100%) 30 min Vehicle components and their respective at 32 A / 230 V service products must match. Therefore, only use products tested and approved by Charging time Approx. 3 h Mercedes-Benz. (from 20% to 100%) 30 min

at 20 A / 230 V Information on service products Charging time Approx. 6 h (from 20% to 100%) The following table lists all technical data for the service products of the vehicle. Fur- at 12 A / 230 V ther information on service products: http:// Charging time Approx. 9 h bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any smart (from 20% to 100%) 30 min centre. at 8 A / 230 V Service prod- Specifications ucts Corrosion Recommended: G40 Charging cable inhibitor/ antifreeze Charging the battery at a charging station (Y page 149) or wall box Windscreen Temperatures above Nominal voltage 400 V AC, 3- washer fluid freezing point: mixing phase (Y page 150) ratio of 1:100 MB SummerFit to water. Nominal frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz Temperatures below Nominal current 32 A freezing point: for the correct mixing ratio of Charge output from 4.6 kW to MB WinterFit and water, 22 kW please observe the infor- System of protection IP44 (inserted), mation on the antifreeze IP24 (not inser- container. ted) Outside temperature from -40 °C to +50 °C Bulb types

>> Technical data. Standards IEC 51851-1, The following table lists the correct bulb IEC 62196-1, types of the vehicle: IEC 62186-2 Bulb Type Interface Type 2 to Type 2 Dipped-beam/main-beam H4 60/55 W headlamps Also observe the identification plate on the Front foglamps H 16 charge connector device. Turn signals PY 21 W Fuse allocation 203

Bulb Type Bulb Type Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W Reversing lamp W 16 W Licence plate lighting W 5 W Turn signals PY 21 W Interior lighting W 5 W

Tail lamps Bulb Type Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W Rear foglamp P21 W

Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 1 Starter motor 5 A Brown 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown >> Technical data. 3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brown 4 Airbag 5 A Brown 5 Transmission control unit 25 A Cyan 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue 8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 204 Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow 11 Central control unit 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 14 Power windows (automatic reversing feature) 30 A Green 15 ESP®, transmission control unit 5 A Brown 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue 21 Not smart electric drive: central control unit, fuel 15 A Blue pump, injection 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 smart electric drive only: power supply control 40 A Orange unit 24 ‑ ‑ ‑ 25 Power supply control unit 30 A Green 26 Radio 20 A Yellow 27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brown 28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown 30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue 31 Rear fog lamps ‑ ‑ 32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue

>> Technical data. 33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning lamp 25 A Cyan button, locking button, headlamp range control, power windows, licence plate lighting, radio, control unit for heating or climate control system, cruise control, limiter, parking aid button, program selector button, tailgate release, Lane Keep- ing Assist camera, automatic start/stop system button 34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors 205

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 36 Left-hand dipped beam, central control unit 10 A Red 37 Right-hand dipped beam 10 A Red 38 Left-hand dipped beam, central control unit 10 A Red 39 - 42 ‑ ‑ ‑ 43 Exterior mirror heating 5 A Brown 44 Automatic reversing feature 25 A Cyan 45 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow 47 - 49 ‑ ‑ ‑

Radio type approvals for the tyre pres- Country Radio type approval number sure monitors Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Country Radio type approval number Type Approval Number: Argen- MW2433A TRC/LPD/2012/114 tina H-12337 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 MHz. GG4 Type Approval Number: H-12338 TRC/LPD/2012/190 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Model: MW2433A Type Approval Number: 0381-13-8001 TRC/LPD/2011/158 Model: GG4 Type Number: LPD Abu TRA, Registered-NO Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 Dhabi ER0092100/12 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 Dubai TRA, Registered-NO MR6706 ANRT 2011 ER0099792/12 Moldova 1024 TRA, Registered-NO ER0076990/11 Philip- No: ESD-1206394C Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 pines No: ESD-1306871C >> Technical data. Serbia И 011 12 Singa- Compliance with IDA Standard pore DA- 103365 South TA-2012/719 Africa TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 206 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones

Installing two-way radios and mobile In particular, the following conditions phones must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used WARNING Robserve the maximum permissible out- G put in these wavebands The electromagnetic radiation from two- Ronly approved aerial positions may be way radios can interfere with the vehicle used electronics if they are manipulated or ret- Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia- rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise tion can cause damage to health. The use of the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an exterior aerial takes into consideration a risk of an accident. the scientific discussion surrounding the You should have all work on electrical and possible health risk posed by electromag- electronic components carried out at a netic fields. qualified specialist workshop. The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of two-way radios: G WARNING If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radiation can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example if: Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly mounted or is not low-reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. : Front roof area Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit- ; Rear roof area ted at a qualified specialist workshop. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 When operating two-way radios in the (Road Vehicles – EMC guidelines for instal- vehicle, always connect them to the low- lation of aftermarket radio frequency trans- reflection exterior aerial. mitting equipment) when retrofitting two- way radios. Comply with the legal require- ! Only have work carried out on the engine ments for add-on parts. electronics and its associated parts, such If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio as control units, sensors, actuating com- equipment, use the power supply and aerial ponents and connector leads, at a qualified connections intended for use in the basic specialist workshop. Vehicle components wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's may otherwise wear more quickly and the additional instructions during installation. >> Technical data. vehicle's operating permit may be invali- Deviations with respect to wavebands, max- dated. imum transmission outputs or aerial posi- ! The operating permit may be invalidated tions must be approved by smart. if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. Installing two-way radios and mobile phones 207

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Tetra 20 W 380 - 410 MHz Mobile communications 6 W generation 2G/3G/4G

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RTwo-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTetra RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G) >> Technical data.

Z 208 Symbols in the Owner's Manual Publication details The following symbols are used in this Own- Internet er's Manual: G WARNING Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites: which could pose a threat to your health or http://www.smart.com life, or to the health and life of others. http://www.daimler.com H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with Editorial office information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this ! Notes on material damage alert you to Owner's Manual to the technical documen- dangers that could lead to damage to your tation team at the following address: vehicle. Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, i These symbols indicate useful instruc- 70546 Stuttgart, Germany tions or further information that could be ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated helpful to you. or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. X Instructions that must be followed. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several consecutive steps. Vehicle manufacturer (Y page) Further information on a topic YY A warning or an instruction that is con- Daimler AG tinued on the next page. Mercedesstraße 137 Display text: Display text in the instru- 70327 Stuttgart ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys- tem or the smart Media-System. Germany

As at 13.06.2017 6522 0254 02 453 584 11 12 Edition ÄJ2017-1b Order no. Part no. 4535841112 É4535841112"ËÍ

>> Owner's Manual smart fortwo coupé and smart fortwo cabrio electric drive

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand Owner's Manual, smart fortwo coupé and cabrio electric drive